manualshive.com logo in svg

Panasonic KX-NS500, Pc Programming Manual

The Panasonic KX-NS500 is a versatile communication system. Seamlessly configure and optimize its features with the free PC Programming Manual. This comprehensive manual is available for download, at no cost, from manualshive.com. Unlock the full potential of your KX-NS500 and enhance your business's communication experience today.

Share
Download
background image

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a
party leaves a conference call.

Value Range

Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9  PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.14.2  Conference
2.25.2  Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds
a call.

Value Range

Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9  PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.2  Confirmation Tone

Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.

Value Range

Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

10.9  PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Feature Guide References

2.25.1  Dial Tone

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension

Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.

PC Programming Manual

529

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Summary of Contents for KX-NS500

Page 1: ...urchasing this Panasonic product Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use In particular be sure to read 1 1 1 For Your Safety Page 14 before using this product KX NS500 PFMPR Software File Version 001 00000 or later ...

Page 2: ...eatures and facilities Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference Links to Other Pages and Manuals If you are viewing this manual with a...

Page 3: ...e PBX automatically saves the system data NOTES The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version as indicated on the cover of this manual To confirm the software version of your PBX see How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards in Maintenance Console Software in 2 3 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ Some optional hardware software and features are no...

Page 4: ...t Status UPS 58 4 1 2 Status Equipment Status CS Information 59 4 1 3 Status Equipment Status PS Information 60 4 1 4 Status Equipment Status UM Port status 61 4 1 5 Status Equipment Status USB 62 5 System Control 63 5 1 System Control Program Update 64 5 1 1 System Control Program Update Download Program File 65 5 1 2 System Control Program Update Update Program File 67 5 1 3 System Control Progr...

Page 5: ...lity Log Web MC Event Log 111 7 3 4 Utility Log UM System Log 112 7 3 5 Utility Log Call Control Log 113 7 4 Utility Monitor Trace 114 7 4 1 Utility Monitor Trace ISDN QSIG Protocol Trace 114 7 4 2 Utility Monitor Trace V IPGW Protocol Trace 115 7 4 3 Utility Monitor Trace V SIPGW Protocol Trace 116 7 4 4 Utility Monitor Trace CS Status Monitor 117 7 4 5 Utility Monitor Trace UM System Trace Inter...

Page 6: ...n Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting 232 9 4 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Trunk Setting 235 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property 239 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property 242 9 7 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property Port Type View 243 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Prope...

Page 7: ... PBX Configuration 2 1 System Date Time 428 10 1 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 1 System Date Time Date Time Setting 428 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving 429 10 1 2 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving 431 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 433 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters 435 10 4 PBX Configur...

Page 8: ...p Incoming Call Distribution Group ACD Supervisor 598 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group 599 11 6 1 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Member List 601 11 7 PBX Configuration 3 7 Group UM Group 602 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings 602 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings 604 11 7 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 G...

Page 9: ...ation Simplified Voice Message 723 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console 725 12 3 1 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console DSS key data copy 735 13 PBX Configuration 5 Optional Device 737 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone 738 13 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Optional Device External Pager 741 13 3 PBX Configuration 5 3 Optional Device Voice Message 742 13 3 1 PBX Confi...

Page 10: ...ion 11 2 Maintenance PT Programming Access 844 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation 845 20 UM Configuration 1 Mailbox Settings 851 20 1 UM Configuration 1 Mailbox Settings 852 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting 852 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting 855 20 1 3 UM Configuration 1 3 Mailbox Settings Auto Configuration 883 21 UM Co...

Page 11: ...Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP 984 27 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Server Feature FTP 987 27 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP 989 27 2 4 Network Service 2 5 Server Feature NTP 990 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP 991 27 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 995 27 3 Network Service 3 Client Feature 997 27 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP 997 27 3 2 Network Ser...

Page 12: ...12 PC Programming Manual Table of Contents ...

Page 13: ...Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX PC Programming Manual 13 ...

Page 14: ...t misuse could result in death or serious injury CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be observed This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedur...

Page 15: ...e PBX has no passwords set initially For security select an installer password as soon as the PBX system is installed at the site 4 Change the passwords periodically 5 It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal iden...

Page 16: ...able for programming using Web Maintenance Console On line Mode On line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to modify the system data and settings used by the PBX Settings can be modified and results are displayed in real time Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX s temporary memory DRAM To finalise the changes you must either s...

Page 17: ...en storing a name message password or other text entry data using a PC The available characters vary according to the model of PBX Note For NE models the tables differ depending on the Area Code selected in Easy Setup Table 1 Standard PC Programming Manual 17 1 1 3 Entering Characters ...

Page 18: ...Table 2 For NE model 18 PC Programming Manual 1 1 3 Entering Characters ...

Page 19: ...Table 3 For RU UC model PC Programming Manual 19 1 1 3 Entering Characters ...

Page 20: ...Table 4 For Greece 20 PC Programming Manual 1 1 3 Entering Characters ...

Page 21: ...e may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web Maintenance Console A message may be displayed that reads Stop running this script This message is automatically displayed when a script takes a long time to complete If this message is displayed click No to continue using Web Maintenance Console If you click Yes you will have to close the browser window for Web Maintenance Console and log in ag...

Page 22: ...connected The connection can be made through a local area network LAN a virtual private network VPN or over the Internet A PC can also be connected directly to the maintenance port of the PBX Note When connecting to Web Maintenance Console over the Internet the use of an encrypted communication method such as SSL is strongly recommended For details contact your network s administrator Connecting t...

Page 23: ...d Follow the prompts to install a security certificate The procedure may vary according to your browser Note You can also connect to the PBX in On line mode using the Off line Web Maintenance Console Programme Launcher For details see Connecting in On line Mode using the Programme Launcher in 1 2 2 PC Programming Using Off line Mode 3 The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed For detai...

Page 24: ...ter the Password 5 Click the Connect button 3 The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed For details about logging in see 2 1 3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 4 After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console the Home screen will be displayed and programming can be performed For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance Console see 3 1 Home Screen...

Page 25: ...est version of KX NS500 Off line WEB Maintenance Console Before beginning the installation of Off line Web Maintenance Console the following software must be installed on the PC Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Microsoft NET Framework 4 This software can be downloaded from Microsoft s online Download Center To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional you must be logged ...

Page 26: ...ecessary To create a new system data file 1 In the Programme Launcher click New Offline Mode The Off line Web Maintenance Console login screen will be displayed in your PC s Web browser For details about the login screen see 2 1 3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2 Log in to Off line Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account and password to start the Easy Setup Wizard For deta...

Page 27: ...ntenance Console in On line mode You can save the IP address and port information for each PBX in a profile This feature is useful when there are multiple PBXs in your network For details about connecting to the PBX in On line mode see Connecting to Web Maintenance Console On line Mode in 1 2 1 Starting Web Maintenance Console To connect in On line mode using the Programme Launcher 1 In the Progra...

Page 28: ...om the Others folder to edit them After saving edited files import them to the PBX The following types of data types can be edited Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID Incoming Call DDI DID Table Wired Extension PS Extension For details see 6 5 Tool Import and 6 6 Tool Export Programming in Off line Mode Once you have logged in to Off line Web Maintenance Console programming is very similar to On line...

Page 29: ...7 2 2 Utility File File Transfer PBX to PC 2 Use the Open Offline Mode command in the Programme Launcher to load the PBX system file in Off line mode For details refer to Opening an Existing System Data File above 3 Perform the desired programming in Off line mode and then click the icon to save the modified system settings to your PC 4 Log in to Web Maintenance Console in On line mode and then us...

Page 30: ... then click OK Note The Export button is available only when in Off line mode 3 Open the exported CSV data in the Terminal Label Print utility and then edit the label settings as necessary a In the Programme Launcher click Terminal Label Print b Select Open Specify the exported CSV file in the dialogue that is displayed and then click OK c Edit the following settings as necessary Label Specifies t...

Page 31: ...Section 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX PC Programming Manual 31 ...

Page 32: ...ch menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts User Administrator Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings This account level is used by on site managers and network administrators Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance Console to add users or programme user settings User Administrator accounts are intended for mainte...

Page 33: ...ser Single User User For more information about creating and managing end user accounts see Section 8 Users CAUTION To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords 1 Please provide all system passwords to the customer 2 To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX keep the passwords secret and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords and the possible dange...

Page 34: ...User User accounts cannot be used when programming in Off line mode A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level Home Screen Menu Option Off line On line A I U A I System Information ü ü ü ü ü Logout ü ü ü ü ü Tool Menu Option Off line On line A I U A I System Data Backup to USB ü ü System Data Backup to NAS ü ü NDSS Link Data Clear ü Call Pickup for My Group ü ü ...

Page 35: ... PS Extension ü ü Export Quick Dial ü ü Export SIP Extension ü ü Export V IPGW GW Settings ü ü Export V IPGW DN2IP ü ü Export V SIPGW Settings ü ü Export V SIPGW Provider ü ü Screen Customise ü ü UM Data Backup ü UM Data Restore ü UM Backup History ü DXDP All OUS ü Contact information ü ü ü ü UT Option Setting ü ü URL Information ü ü Utility Menu Option Off line On line A I U A I Diagnosis Card Di...

Page 36: ...r ü UM System Trace Internal ü E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ü E1 Line Trace ü Digital Trunk Error Report ü IP Extension Statistical Information ü UM View Reports ü ü E mail Report ü ü Activation Key Installation ü Email Notification Alert ü ü Email Notification System Analysis ü Email Notification Test Email ü UM Command ü UM System Prompts Customisation ü ü Automatic Two way Recording ü ü ü ü UM Sys...

Page 37: ...If someone using the Installer level account is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes and another user logs in using the Installer level account the user logging in may override the other logged in user so that programming can be performed a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently logged in user Users can view only menus and settin...

Page 38: ...You must log in using the Installer level account name and password The Installer level account name is INSTALLER The default Installer level account password is 1234 After logging in the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed Select a language and then click Install Refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual for detailed and important information about configuring the PBX ...

Page 39: ...correctly in the PBX and is capable of being used normally Out of service means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX but has been temporarily removed from use This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded Fault means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly or is not functioning correctly For more information see the Installation Manual For details about how ...

Page 40: ...ange Wired Extension Portable Station ICD Group PS Ring Group OGM DISA External Pager UM VM Extension UM Group VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group Extension Numbers Names List Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type and names Click entries to select them and click the Add button when finished to add the selected extensions To deselect an entry click it again Value Range Ma...

Page 41: ... 2 Click Yes Note If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down or the Web browser is closed any changes that have not been saved to the System Memory will be lost To save settings while programming click the button on the Home screen Always end your programming session by clicking the button If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in We...

Page 42: ...nd password correct Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX A Yes This is possible in Off line mode Create a new system data file in Off line mode see 1 2 2 PC Programming Using Off line Mode modify settings as necessary and then upload this file to the PBX later see 7 2 1 Utility File File Transfer PC to PBX Maintenance Console Software Q How do I confirm the s...

Page 43: ... Configuration Option from In Service INS to Out of Service OUS Portable Stations Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station A Do the PINs Personal Identification Numbers of the PBX and the Portable Station match Confirm that they are the same Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS Has the Porta...

Page 44: ... necessary for it to operate Numbering Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension A Change the extension number of the target port to the new number and click Apply Next set the port to OUS status and then back to INS status Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was engaged in a call but the display still shows the previous extension number A Th...

Page 45: ...n numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan or delete the extension number see 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings and 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings 2 Clear the Leading Number cell 3 Click Apply 4 Modify the No of Additional Digits cell as required 5 Click Apply 6 Enter the desired value in t...

Page 46: ...lue in the Dial cell of the desired feature 3 Click Apply Q I cannot change a feature number A It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by A feature number An extension A Dial setting see 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Quick Dialling see 10 6 2 PBX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering P...

Page 47: ...ectly after modifying settings the modified settings are not updated in the PBX A When you click Apply the settings are updated in the PBX but are not yet saved to the System Memory If system data is not saved to the System Memory the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset or power is turned off and back on again Therefore before resetting the ...

Page 48: ...gs screen Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions A Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 10 7 3 PBX Configuration 2 7 3 System Class of Service Internal Call Block screen Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose extensions are blocked from calling each other Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions A Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted...

Page 49: ...nfiguration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings screen from the Queuing Time Table tab select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution ICD group A Perform the following steps 1 On the 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List...

Page 50: ...50 PC Programming Manual 2 3 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ ...

Page 51: ...Section 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 51 ...

Page 52: ...us of cards For more information see 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Maintenance Screen Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items From the Maintenance Screen you can Check the status and equipment of the PBX Backup or update PBX system files Use tools and reports to monitor and analyse system usage For more information see Maintenance Screen Tree View It...

Page 53: ...gle Mode When Tab Mode is used items clicked in the tree are displayed in new tabs When Single Mode is used the current tab displays the clicked item Note When the Menu button is clicked or when you log out in Tab Mode all child tabs are closed When a parent tab is closed all of its child tabs are closed When Tab Mode is used Up to 10 tabs can be opened including the parent tab Tabs are displayed ...

Page 54: ... View Items Item Primary Functions Users Manage view and add PBX user profiles and account information For details see Section 8 Users PBX Configuration Configure PBX hardware settings for cards equipment and networking Configure network wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service Configure dialling features call routing and incoming call settings Configure call logging SMDR and other PBX ma...

Page 55: ...rom drop down menu 3 In Copy To select one or more paste destinations Hold down the Ctrl key and click to select destinations one at a time or hold down the Shift key and click to select a range of destinations 4 In Items select one or more items to copy from the source selected in Copy From Hold down the Ctrl key and click to select items one at a time or hold down the Shift key and click to sele...

Page 56: ...56 PC Programming Manual 3 1 Home Screen ...

Page 57: ...Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 57 ...

Page 58: ...d for the UPS system Battery Voltage V The voltage of the UPS battery is displayed 0 240 V Battery Charge Percentage The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed percentage value Power Supply Displays the usage status of the UPS if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX UPS Shutdown Conditions Battery level From the drop down list select the amount of remaining battery level for ...

Page 59: ...isplay shows OFF The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model For more details see the documentation for your CS Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS Ring Group To view CS information 1 From the Target CS I F Shelf Slot No drop down list select the target shelf and slot To display information on a single card select the shelf number slot ...

Page 60: ...evel account in On line mode The displayed items are as follows Item Description PS No PS location number Only registered PSs will be displayed Extension Number Extension number of the PS Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with 60 PC Programming Manual 4 1 3 Status Equipment Status PS Information ...

Page 61: ...rt s status will be displayed in one of the following ways Online Ready The port is ready to be used Incoming Call The port is handling an incoming call Outgoing Call An outgoing service is being processed Error Occurred An error has been detected Off Line The port is offline This screen can be accessed only in On line mode PC Programming Manual 61 4 1 4 Status Equipment Status UM Port status ...

Page 62: ...nected to the PBX Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX click Unmount Note If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount the data on the USB memory device may be damaged None No USB memory device is detected by the PBX This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 62 PC Programming Manual 4 1 5 Status Equipment Status USB ...

Page 63: ...ction 5 System Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 63 ...

Page 64: ...65A KX NT343 KX NT346 KX NT343 PNT300 KX NT321 PNT321 KX UT133 KX UT136 PUT13X KX UT113 KX UT123 PUT1XX KX NT511 PNT511 KX NT543 KX NT546 PNT540 KX NT551 KX NT553 KX NT556 PNT550 KX NT560 PNT560 KX UT248 PUT248 KX UT670 PUT670 Firmware for KX NS500 PFPGA PFPGA PARMIRNR PARMIRNR PARMVDNR PARMVDNR PARMIREP PARMIREP PARMVDEP PARMVDEP PC300NR PC300NR PC300EP PC300EP PC300DAG PC300DAG CS Programmes CS ...

Page 65: ...an FTP server from the FTP connection name drop down list and specify the number of attempts to connect to the FTP server in No of retries To specify a new FTP site see 27 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP NAS Specify the location of the updated programme files stored on a directory of the NAS to Web Maintenance Console 2 Specify which PBX programme files will be automatically downloaded ...

Page 66: ...y or weekly basis 4 In Email notification specify up to 2 e mail addresses that will receive an e mail notification when updated files have been discovered or when updated files have been downloaded Note If Download automatically is not selected in step 2 specify at least one e mail address so that an administrator will be notified when updated files have been discovered 5 To begin automatic check...

Page 67: ... files listed by checking the boxes next to each item Note When selecting an item a warning message may be displayed Confirm the contents of the warning and then click OK to continue 3 Click Apply 4 Click Execute The programme files are updated to the PBX Note The updated PBX resets when the update is complete Timed Update Automatic update Specify which cards or devices to update and a time to exe...

Page 68: ... number of the system software stored on the Main unit is compared to the system software currently in the IP PT after the IP PT has been registered to the PBX If the software on the Main unit is newer it is downloaded to the IP PT By default Plug and Update is set to Off for Main unit 1 In Plug Update select On for each to enable this feature 2 Click OK 68 PC Programming Manual 5 1 3 System Contr...

Page 69: ...y require some time a time can be set in Time Set 3 In BGM No specify which BGM number the MOH file will occupy 4 Click Execute to confirm the settings If Now is set for Time Set the installation will begin at this time Note Only WAV files can be installed and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length including the file extension wav Only use ASCII characters in file names Files may not b...

Page 70: ...nly in On line mode 1 In BGM No specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from Specify All to delete the data saved in all BGM numbers 2 Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers Note User User level accounts cannot perform this procedure 70 PC Programming Manual 5 2 2 System Control MOH Delete ...

Page 71: ... up at a time 2 A save file dialogue will appear Specify the directory on the PC to back up the file to 3 Click OK when finished Note Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added The amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5 2 1 System Control MOH Install is not reflected in this value User User level accounts cannot perform this p...

Page 72: ...orted into the system because performing a backup would overwrite the imported data with the current PBX settings This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 1 Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message 2 Click Backup or Skip according to the system s status Backup Click to backup system settings The system will be reset after the backup has been performed Skip The system is reset ...

Page 73: ...overwrite the imported data with the current PBX settings This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 1 Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message 2 Click Backup or Skip according to the system s status Backup Click to backup system settings The system will prepare for shutdown after the backup has been performed Skip The system is prepared for shutdown without performing a backup ...

Page 74: ...74 PC Programming Manual 5 4 System Control System Shutdown ...

Page 75: ...Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 75 ...

Page 76: ...ecified files If backup data already exists on the USB memory device it will be deleted A confirmation message will be displayed Click Continue 4 A time estimation for the backup will be displayed Click Continue 5 A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup A message will be displayed when the backup is finished Click OK Note Unified Messaging UM data must be backed up using...

Page 77: ...the parameters necessary to connect the NAS to the PBX IP address of the NAS etc and then confirm the connection See 27 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS 2 Select the system data items to backup System Data System data includes programming information for the PBX including extension and network configuration information MOH OGM MOH Music on Hold and OGM Outgoing Message sound files stored on the P...

Page 78: ... PBX To clear this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs This screen can be accessed only in On line mode To clear the NDSS Link Data When this tree menu item is selected a confirmation screen will be displayed Click OK to clear the data Click Cancel to keep the data and close the screen 78 PC Programming Manual 6 2 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear ...

Page 79: ...ted a confirmation screen will be displayed 2 Click Yes The Group Call Pickup feature number default 40 the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial Note This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to 0 0 is not used for another feature number The Group Call Pickup fe...

Page 80: ...tension Portable Station Wireless Extension Portable Station SIP IP PT S PS SIP IP PT S PS Extension UM VM Unified Messaging UM Group VPS Voice Mail ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group UM Group Unified Messaging UM Group VM DPT Group VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group VM DTMF Group Pager External Pager OGM DISA DISA DSS DSS Console DPT I F CS PT interface C...

Page 81: ...e CO Line Access Number Telephone Number Dial CLI Destination CLI Destination Related programming 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial Note Imported Speed Dial and Caller ID data can be copied to a specific speed dial destination The copy range can be specified by selecting the from to of the index Incoming Call DDI DID Table Data Type Import Destination Location Location DDI DID N...

Page 82: ...o select no fields to select Related programming 16 3 PBX Configuration 8 3 ARS Routing Plan Time Wired Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected automatically Extension Number Extension Number selected automatically Extension Name Extension Name selected automatically Related programming 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PS Extension Dat...

Page 83: ...W Group No Connection for IP GW Connection for IP GW Protocol Protocol Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 3rd IP Codec Priority 3rd Packet Sampling Time G 711A Packet Sampling Time G 711A Packet Sampling Time G 711Mu Packet Sampling Time G 711Mu Packet Sampling Time G 729A Packet ...

Page 84: ...er Remaining Number of Digits Remaining Number of Digits GW No GW Group Selection GW No GW Group Selection GW Group GW Group GW No GW No Related programming 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main V IPGW DN2IP V SIPGW Settings Data Type Import Destination no fields to select no fields to select Related programming 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Po...

Page 85: ...ield select the preferred field from the drop down list To not import a field select the blank option from the drop down list 7 Click OK to perform the import operation Depending on the type of data imported the relevant programming screen may be displayed Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destinat...

Page 86: ...level Note The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List Separator found in the Windows Control Panel s Regional Options To export system data 1 From the Tool tree menu select Export and then click the type of data to export 2 Select the check boxes next to the names of the fields to export and then click OK 3 If a message window is displaye...

Page 87: ...d in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User Administrator account level To modify displayed screens 1 Click the access level to modify 2 Select the items that you want to have displayed Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed 3 Click OK PC Programming Manual 8...

Page 88: ...nu b Mailbox Prompts Owner Name Personal Greetings Personal Caller ID Name Interview Personal Group List Name EMD List Member Name c Mailbox Messages Note Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process Additionally Unified Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data For these reasons we recommend backing up data when the Unified Messagi...

Page 89: ...ecify a location on your local PC to save the backup data USB Flash Drive Main Unit Back up the data to a USB memory device connected to the Main unit When USB Flash Drive Main Unit is selected a folder selection menu becomes active Specify a folder on the USB memory device for saving the backup data NAS Back up the data to a NAS When NAS is selected a folder selection menu becomes active Specify ...

Page 90: ...acity has reached the specified amount Delete After Backup Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox Message Type Specify to back up all messages or only messages marked as old Note An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring For example if a mailbox is full but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention Da...

Page 91: ...types of items to restore will be highlighted Click a folder in the list to display its name in the text box You can also click a folder name to display that folder s contents and then click a folder to select it Note When restoring data from a local PC up to 40 files can be selected at one time When there are a large number of files to restore they should be restored from the folder on the USB me...

Page 92: ... files correspond to which UM data items A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a New Old Deleted copy of the same message Voice data recorded by users in a KX TVM series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the KX NS500 s Unified Messaging system For details refer to 5 3 Starting Web Maintenance Console KX TVM System Prompt and M...

Page 93: ...ds for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen Description Parameters Completion Status Date Time Total Elapsed Time HH MM SS This screen can be accessed only in On line mode PC Programming Manual 93 6 10 Tool UM Backup History ...

Page 94: ...us of all DXDP XDP extension ports to OUS simultaneously for the PBX To set all DXDP XDP ports to OUS for the PBX 1 Access Tool DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view 2 Click OK 94 PC Programming Manual 6 11 Tool DXDP All OUS ...

Page 95: ...the PBX here When users select this tree menu item this information will be displayed for the user s reference 1 Input the following information and then click OK Company Name Telephone Number Fax Number Address URL Email Address PC Programming Manual 95 6 12 Tool Contact information ...

Page 96: ...Note For more information about dial plans refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX UT series SIP phone You can enter up to 500 characters in the dial plan text box You can assign up to 20 dial plans separating them with a vertical bar You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan When OK is clicked the entered text string will be validated If there is a validation error a message will b...

Page 97: ... be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in download button displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu For details see 8 2 1 Users Add User Single User Specify a valid URL address for Unified Messaging Plug in and then click OK PC Programming Manual 97 6 14 Tool URL Information ...

Page 98: ...ssage Delete All Recording 2 Click OK 6 15 2 Tool SVM Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage Displays information on the voice messages stored by the SVM feature For each message the type of message and the associated extension are displayed To check the current usage 1 Access Tool SVM Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage 98 PC Programming Manual 6 15 2 Tool SVM Simplified Voice Mess...

Page 99: ...Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 99 ...

Page 100: ...ted below Test Type Available Cards Local loop back diagnosis DLC2 DLC8 DLC16 LCOT6 Pre installed Option PRI30 E1 DTMF Receive test port DHLC4 MCSCL8 MCSLC16 Pre installed Option PT loop back diagnosis DLC2 DLC8 DLC16 DHLC4 To perform a card test 1 Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested and set it to OUS 2 Click on the cell showing the card type A new window will be displayed 3 Select t...

Page 101: ... screen can be accessed only in On line mode To perform a Ping test 1 Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box 2 Click Test to perform the test The result will be displayed 3 Select an option Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information 1 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 2 Click Save Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen PC Programming Manual 101 7 1 2 Ut...

Page 102: ...rmation matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message The names of all files that can be stored in the System Memory are as follows System Data Name on System Memory Corresponding Card DFSYS Mother Board DFSYS_R Mother Board 1 1 DFSYS file format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as DFSYS_R...

Page 103: ...ly one error data file its name will be SYSERR If there is more than one file the files will be numbered in chronological order up to a maximum of 9 files KX UT series SIP phone configuration data can be transferred to a PC and then imported using the phone s Web user interface For details refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX UT series SIP phone To transfer files to the PC 1 Select ...

Page 104: ...The effective date PFMPR ID activation key type number of activation keys and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen To view information of programme and activation key files stored in the System Memory and SD card 1 Click on the name of the desired programme or activation key file 2 Click Detail The Detail screen will be displayed You can select different files from...

Page 105: ...ot be deleted if the Program Update feature s timed update is set or if an update is currently being performed For details see 5 1 2 System Control Program Update Update Program File To delete files from the System Memory 1 Click on the file to be deleted 2 Click Delete A confirmation screen will be displayed 3 Click OK The display will return to the File Delete screen PC Programming Manual 105 7 ...

Page 106: ... The Open dialogue box will be displayed 3 Select the message files to upload The files must be in the WAV format It is possible to select multiple files Note When selecting files to copy to the PBX the file names apart from the file extension cannot be more than 33 characters in length When selecting G 711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX the total file size of all selected files combined canno...

Page 107: ...fer a certain message select the number of that message To transfer all messages at once select ALL The Save dialogue box will be displayed 2 Enter a file name 3 Click Save 4 Click OK When you choose to transfer all messages each message is saved as an individual file with a number appended to the file name corresponding to that message s location in the System Memory When complete the display wil...

Page 108: ...t operation of the whole system or result in system failure Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions The items displayed on screen are as follows Item Description Date The date of the error detection Time The time of the error detection Error Code The 3 digit error code assigned by the ...

Page 109: ...it EXP S card 00 Optional physical service card slots 01 05 Virtual shelf Virtual Trunk slots 01 04 Virtual Extension slots 05 08 Virtual IP CS slots 09 12 When X is 5 YY Process code ZZ Port Number When X is not 5 ZZ Optional service card port number 01 XX When X is 5 ZZ Process number determined by each process Note When there is no parameter for slot and port number YY and ZZ will be displayed ...

Page 110: ... the log includes the following information Type Describes the type of system event Date The date and time the system event occurred Message Details about the system event This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 110 PC Programming Manual 7 3 2 Utility Log Syslog ...

Page 111: ...ccessing Web Maintenance Console Description A description of the action taken by the user i e Login to Web MC IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance Console To save the event log as a text file 1 From the Web MC Event Log screen select Save The Save dialogue box will be displayed 2 Enter a file name 3 Click Save To clear the event log 1 From the Web MC Event Log screen...

Page 112: ...om the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 1 Click OK to export a UM System Log file 2 Click Save to save the data to a local file 3 Click OK 112 PC Programming Manual 7 3 4 Utility Log UM System Log ...

Page 113: ...ed Status The new setting status of the following settings is displayed 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Main Area ID for logical partition 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System OptionsOption 2 Applying logical partitioning Status Item Description Date The date on which the call restriction event from the logical partitioning feature occurred Time The time at which ...

Page 114: ...s retrieved and displayed Error Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets To view trace data 1 From the Shelf Slot No drop down list select the target slot Each card will be preceded by a 2 digit number following the pattern X Y X Shelf number 1 4 1 KX NS500 basic unit 2 Expansion Unit1...

Page 115: ...ocol trace is complete The trace data has been saved to the System Memory file name PRTH323 To transfer trace data to the PC 1 Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen The list of files will be displayed Note The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu see 7 2 2 Utility File File Transfer PBX to PC 2 Select the desired trace data file 3 Click T...

Page 116: ...ect V SIPGW Protocol Trace When the progress bar disappears the protocol trace is complete The trace data has been saved to the System Memory file name PRTSIPC To transfer trace data to the PC 1 Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen The list of files will be displayed Note The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu see 7 2 2 Utility File Fi...

Page 117: ...th Monitored Value Monitored value dBm of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with Monitored Level Monitored level signal strength level of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with Error Rate Error Rate of the CS for each CS that it is currently synchronised with To monitor the status of CSs 1 From the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop down list select the desired Air Synch...

Page 118: ...nified Messaging system Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data 1 Select Internal Trace Display or Trace Clear Setting 1 Check Enable Disable Trace Data 2 Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor 3 Click OK Display Displays the trace data and or error data 1 Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor 2 To include error data click the Error Trace tab and check Err...

Page 119: ... from 0 to 1 or vice versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed To view signalling bit information 1 From the Shelf Slot No drop down list select the target slot Each card will be preceded by a 2 digit number following the pattern X Y X Shelf number 1 4 1 KX NS500 basic unit 2 Expansion Unit1 3 Expansion Unit2 4 Expansion Unit3 Y Slot number 1 7 2 From the Interval...

Page 120: ...rop down list select the target slot Each card will be preceded by a 2 digit number following the pattern X Y X Shelf number 1 4 1 KX NS500 basic unit 2 Expansion Unit1 3 Expansion Unit2 4 Expansion Unit3 Y Slot number 1 7 2 From the CH No drop down list select the target channel 3 Click Start Trace information will be displayed The information is automatically updated whenever the data being moni...

Page 121: ...og Out of SYNC 300 Digital trunk out of sync Loss of Signal RAI 301 Digital trunk RAI signal reception AIS 302 Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception Frame Failure 300 Digital trunk frame failure Loss of Frame Counter of minor communication error CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error SF Severely errored frame or Severe Framing Error FE Frame synchronisation bit error LV Line Code Violation SL...

Page 122: ...ounter Total number of packets abandoned RTP Arrive Packet Interval MAX ms Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive RTP Arrive Packet Interval MIN ms Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive To view IP extension information 1 From the Card Selection drop down list select the slot number for the card 2 Click Execute The statistical information will be displayed 3 Select an option Click Capture if...

Page 123: ...ues CSV A file save dialogue is displayed Specify the folder to export the report file to To clear a report For each report all data can be cleared Follow the steps below to clear all report data Some reports can also be set to automatically clear at specified times 1 Select the Report Data Clear Manual tab 2 Select the desired report from Report Parameters 3 Click Report Data Clear To automatical...

Page 124: ... indications since the last clearing of this report 100 records are displayed at a time for this report Fax Transfer Report 1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax extension It includes the fax reception date the port number used and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax messages Call Handling Statistic ...

Page 125: ...tatistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls the connected time per hour etc 1 This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings PC Programming Manual 125 7 5 3 Utility Report UM View Reports ...

Page 126: ...of the message Voice mail notifications 5 000 entries Missed call notifications 1 000 entries Other e mail messages system messages etc 1 000 entries Note Messages sent by the PBX such as system alerts will list the user as System and the mailbox number as If these maximum amounts are exceeded older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be deleted as new entries are recorded To dele...

Page 127: ...ion key files stored in the specified directory is displayed Check the boxes next to the activation keys to install to the PBX and click Install 3 The activation keys will be copied to the Main unit When installation is complete the message The activation key has been installed and activated successfully is displayed 4 Click OK Note You can click the provided link to directly access 9 3 PBX Config...

Page 128: ...sent unintentionally to a third party 3 In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e mails that are sent 4 Click OK when finished Licence Expiry When activation keys that are registered to the PBX and have a limited duration are about to expire an e mail message can be sent to the specified addresses When 10 days remain in the duration of a registered activation key the ...

Page 129: ...Check the Log File Type drop down menu select a log file to send to the e mail address 2 Enter up to 2 e mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2 3 In Subject enter text to be used as the subject line of the e mail sent 4 Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time PC Programming Manual 129 7 7 2 Utility Email Notification System Analysis ...

Page 130: ...e 1 Enter up to 2 e mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2 2 In Subject enter text to be used as the subject line of the e mail sent 3 Click Execute A test mail will be sent to the specified address es Mail settings can be viewed and set in 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP 130 PC Programming Manual 7 7 3 Utility Email Notification Test Email ...

Page 131: ...ing system using the Commands dialogue This screen can be accessed only in On line mode Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue 1 Enter the desired command then click RUN Results from entered commands are displayed 2 When finished click Close PC Programming Manual 131 7 8 1 Utility Command UM Command ...

Page 132: ... Then you can restore the system prompts to their initial state by restoring the backup data See 6 9 Tool UM Data Restore for details Deleting Prompts The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts To delete a specific system prompt 1 Select the cell for the desired prompt number 2 Click Delete Recording System Prompts 1 Select the desired system prompt to record and click Play Record 2...

Page 133: ...Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback 1 Select the desired system prompts 2 Click Play Record 3 Click Play or Stop PC Programming Manual 133 7 9 Utility UM System Prompts Customisation ...

Page 134: ...tic Two way Recording feature for agent extensions These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User Administrator account 1 Click Add Delete 2 Select supervisor extensions from the list and click OK 3 Repeat this procedure to add multiple supervisors Click OK when finished 134 PC Programming Manual 7 10 1 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Supervisor Setting ...

Page 135: ...hat type of calls to record check the boxes to specify if internal calls external calls and or calls made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox 4 In Select User Extensions click Add 5 Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control and then click OK 6 Click List View to confirm the current Automatic Two way Recording settings for ea...

Page 136: ...tribution group are recorded 2 Select On or Off for that setting 3 Click OK when finished The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List Extension Name Indicates the n...

Page 137: ...ed through an incoming call distribution group to the extension are automatically recorded Note External Call must be set to On to set this item to On Value Range On Off Maintenance Console Location 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List Feature Guide References 3 2 1 4 Automatic Two way Recording for Manager Supervisor Indicates the extension designated as a supervisor ...

Page 138: ... two way recordings will be stored reference only Value Range Mailbox number Maintenance Console Location 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List PC Programming Manual References 7 10 2 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting Feature Guide References 3 2 1 4 Automatic Two way Recording for Manager 138 PC Programming Manual 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Re...

Page 139: ...inue until one of the following occurs The Stop button is clicked The two way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached The date and time set in Recording Period is reached 2 To set a specific time when Automatic Two way Recording will stop a In Recording Period select Yes for Setting b In Date Time enter a year month day hour and minute Click on the calendar and clock numbers to se...

Page 140: ...maintenance System Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time After specifying the settings on this screen click OK 140 PC Programming Manual 7 11 Utility UM System Maintenance ...

Page 141: ...e SIP CS Installation Guide 1 In Super Master CS Web URL enter the URL of the Super Master CS 2 Click Test to confirm if the input URL is correct If the URL is correct the CS Web login screen will open in your web browser 3 Click OK When programming in other screens clicking the SIP CS Web button on that screen will access CS Web system programming at the URL specified here PC Programming Manual 1...

Page 142: ...142 PC Programming Manual 7 12 Utility CS Web Connection ...

Page 143: ...Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 143 ...

Page 144: ...s group User groups can be set in Extension Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Ext No Specifies the extension number associated with this user Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 ...

Page 145: ...g on the row of the user to edit then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user s information filled in See 8 2 1 Users Add User Single User Delete Button To delete users 1 Check the box es next to the user s name s and click the button 2 A confirmation message will appear Click OK 3 The user s information is deleted from the list Add Range Button To add multiple user ...

Page 146: ...programming Select a Scenario number 1 20 from the drop down menu then programme the settings for that scenario Click OK at the bottom of the window when finished Scenario Name Specify a name for the scenario for identification Value Range Max 32 Characters Maintenance Console Location 8 1 1 Users User Profiles Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3 2 2 6 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer ...

Page 147: ...3 Specifies the telephone numbers that the VIP Filter setting will be applied to When a call is received from any of the numbers specified here the call will be transferred immediately to the destination specified in Call Transfer Status Transfer to Selection Other Value Range Max 32 digits Maintenance Console Location 8 1 1 Users User Profiles Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3 2 2 6 Cal...

Page 148: ...n 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Feature Guide References 3 2 2 6 Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status Transfer to specified telephone number 1 If None or Call screening is selected for Call Transfer Status Selection specifying a telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number Note If Call screening is selected the transfer destination will hear the call screeni...

Page 149: ...nsisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 8 1 1 Users User Profiles Advanced setting Feature Guide References 3 2 2 6 Call Transfer Scenario Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer Note More than one option can be selected Value Range Leave a Message Allows the caller to record a message Transfer to a covering extension Transf...

Page 150: ...ced setting Feature Guide References 3 2 2 6 Call Transfer Scenario Scenario Setting You can select scenarios set in 8 1 1 Users User Profiles Advanced setting for your extension A scenario can be set temporarily or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message setting of the extension of the subscriber 14 5 PBX Configuration 6 5 Feature Absent Message Temporary Scenario Settin...

Page 151: ...Level Select a User Level from the drop down list The Installer level account may select User User or User Administrator levels User Administrator level accounts may only select the User User level 1 The First Name and Last Name set on this screen are applied to system settings as follows The First Name and Last Name are copied to the Extension Name for the user s extension number in the following...

Page 152: ...ension PIN to be copied has less characters than the minimum number of characters required for the Mailbox Password the data will not be copied and an error message is displayed See 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Subscriber Minimum Password Length 0 16 digits 2 The e mail addresses set for Email 1 3 on this screen are applied to system settings as follows If Use for missed call notificati...

Page 153: ...folder containing the WAV files you wish to import 3 Select the desired WAV file 4 Click Open to import the file 5 Click Upload 6 Click OK To start and stop prompt playback 1 Select the desired prompt 2 Click Play Record 3 Click Play or Stop 4 Click OK To delete a specific prompt 1 Select the desired prompt 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK Mailbox Password Click to specify the password for the mailbox No...

Page 154: ...ination Phone Home or Phone Mobile as specified in the Contact tab or a manually input number can be specified Speed Dialling View Edit Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen The appropriate screen wired extension or portable station will be opened according to the extension specified for the user Flexible Button View Edit Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen The appropria...

Page 155: ...ce Last Name Rule B Last Name First Name For more information refer to 5 9 Configuration of Users in the Installation Manual Login ID The extension number i e if the extension is 101 the Login ID for the user will also be 101 Password PWD the extension number for the user e g PWD101 Note When OK is clicked if any extensions within the range specified in step 1 already have user accounts associated...

Page 156: ...n s supervisor and Automatic Two way Recording destination mailbox is displayed You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension 1 For an extension click the setting for Internal Call External Call or ICDG Incoming Only Internal Call Extension to extension calls are recorded External Call Calls with outside parties are recorded ICDG Incoming Only Only calls that are received b...

Page 157: ...arty that called the recorded extension may not be available for all recorded messages Length Specify the length of the recorded conversations Period Specify a time period in which calls were recorded To play a message For playback on the PC 1 Select the check box of a message to play 2 At the bottom of the screen select PC 3 Click the button The message will be downloaded as an audio file for pla...

Page 158: ...Incoming Call Distribution Group ACD Supervisor Value Range Registered ACD supervisors Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2 2 2 9 Supervisory Feature ACD Start Monitor Click the Start Monitor button to start monitoring the target ICD group This feature requires the Call Centre Feature Enhancement activation key If this activation key is ...

Page 159: ...ber Status View Mode Specifies the display mode of the status of group members Value Range Standard Simple Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2 2 2 9 Supervisory Feature ACD Options Highlighted Display Settings Number of Current Waiting Calls 1 30 Specifies the threshold number of current waiting calls When this number is matched or exce...

Page 160: ...ACD Options Highlighted Display Settings Colour Mode Specifies the colour mode of highlighted items on the monitor screen Value Range Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Guide References 2 2 2 9 Supervisory Feature ACD Options Highlighted Display Settings Blinking Specifies whether highlighted items blink on the monitor screen Value R...

Page 161: ...report profiles The type of ACD report Group Agent Call and filter conditions are saved in each profile 1 Click the Report Profiles button 2 To load a previously saved report profile click a profile to select it and then click the Load button 3 To save the current report profile assign a name in Profile Name max 32 characters and then click the Save button Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ...

Page 162: ...w The number of overflowed incoming calls to the target ICD group Talk Time Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Average The average talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Max The longest talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Wait Time Wait Time Answered Total The total waiting time of answered calls f...

Page 163: ...from a drop down list Value Range Group Hour 1 Day Date Month Trunk Caller ID CLIP 1 If Hour is selected set the monitoring range for the target group 0 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Guide References 2 2 2 9 Supervisory Feature ACD Group Filter Settings Select Group To select the target group for creating a report follow the procedure below 1 ...

Page 164: ...ed 3 Results for the following items are displayed Item Description Total Answer Total Answer The number of calls that the target agent answers Talk Time Total The total talking time for the target agent HH MM SS Average The average talking time for the target agent HH MM SS Max The longest talking time for the target agent HH MM SS Login Time The total login time for the target agent HH MM SS Not...

Page 165: ...k an agent from those displayed in the Available Agent for ACD Report window to select it Up to 8192 agents are displayed and up to 128 agents can be selected from the list 3 Click to move the selected agents to the Selected Agent for ACD Report window 4 To remove agents from the Selected Agent for ACD Report window click an agent to select it and click 5 Click OK Maintenance Console Location 8 4 ...

Page 166: ...ate The end date of the call End Time The end time of the call HH MM SS Result The processing result Answered Abandoned Overflowed ICDG The incoming ICD Group number Answering Agent The answering member Extension Name Extension Number Talk Time The talking time HH MM SS Wait Time The waiting time HH MM SS Trunk The incoming trunk group number Caller ID CLIP The caller s number 3 Reports can be out...

Page 167: ...d 1 1 If Custom Period is selected set Start Date Start Time End Date End Time also Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Guide References 2 2 2 9 Supervisory Feature ACD Call Filter Settings Call Filter Mode Calls that are the target of an ACD report can be filtered in the following 3 ways Value Range Caller ID CLIP Filter Filtering according to caller ID or ...

Page 168: ...Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Guide References 2 2 2 9 Supervisory Feature ACD 168 PC Programming Manual 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report ...

Page 169: ...Configuration 1 Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 169 ...

Page 170: ...ual card shelf To install a new physical card to the PBX 1 Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right An image of the card will be displayed and information about the card will be shown 2 Click and drag the image of the card to the slot and release it The card will move into the slot space 3 Click OK to confirm To add new virtual cards to the PBX 1 Click on the name of the c...

Page 171: ...ce status To access IP PT port properties 1 When you place the mouse cursor over the IP Phone Registration button on the Slot screen the following choices appear Click an option to open a port properties programming screen IP PT For KX NT300 KX NT500 series and KX NT265 software version 2 00 or later IP PTs 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property SIP MLT For KX UT serie...

Page 172: ...2 Channel SIP Extension Card 4 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Card Property V UTEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel SIP Proprietary Extension Card 4 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property V IPCS4 Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card 4 4 IP CS 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property Pre Installed LOCT6 6 port Analogue Trunk po...

Page 173: ...Interface Card 1 1 Doorphone 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property Option Extension Slot DHLC4 4 port Digital Hybrid Extension Card 2 2 Extension 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property DLC8 8 port Digital Extension Card 2 MCSLC8 8 port SLT Card 2 DLC16 16 port Digital Extension Card 1 1 Extension MCSLC16 16 port SLT Card 1 Card Ty...

Page 174: ... Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property DLC8 8 port Digital Extension Card 2 MCSLC8 8 port SLT Card 2 DLC16 16 port Digital Extension Card 1 1 Extension MCSLC16 16 port SLT Card 1 For more information on the virtual cards and other optional cards see the following sections in the Installation Manual 4 4 Virtual Cards 4 5 Physical Trunk and Extension Cards For information abou...

Page 175: ...sion unit connected to EXP M port 1 Shelf 3 corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP M port 2 Shelf 4 corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP M port 3 Slot Indicates the slot number within the shelf where the card extension or device is located Port Indicates the port number assigned to the extension or device PC Programming Manual 175 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration S...

Page 176: ...11 codec for IP trunk calls Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main DSP CODEC Priority 1 value only others Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls IP extension calls SIP trunk calls Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration...

Page 177: ...guration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main Memory Usage Displays the amount of system memory currently being used displayed as a percentage of total capacity reference only Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main SD card Usage Displays the amount of SD Memory Card memory currently being used displayed as a percent...

Page 178: ...figuration Slot System Property Main Terminal type to Gatekeeper Specifies the connection service type notified to the gatekeeper Value Range Terminal Gateway Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main Gatekeeper ID to Gatekeeper Specifies the authentication ID notified to the gatekeeper Value Range Max 20 Characters Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 179: ... 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9...

Page 180: ...rent locations in a QSIG network Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Co...

Page 181: ... 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs A maximum of 256 gateway groups can be created Value Range 1 256 None Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main Connection for IP GW Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature b...

Page 182: ...ation Slot System Property Main V IPGW GW Settings Option 1 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main IP Codec Priority 1st 2nd 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used For fax communications it is necessary to specif...

Page 183: ...Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main V IPGW GW Settings Option 2 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for pro...

Page 184: ...ion Slot System Property Main FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Con...

Page 185: ...ecifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 272 512 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Propert...

Page 186: ...e Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T 38 protocol Value Range Transferred TCF Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main V IPGW DN2IP Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which to a...

Page 187: ...t System Property Main GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group This setting is only available when GW No GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW Group Value Range 1 256 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main GW No Specifies the number of the destination gateway device This setting is only available when GW No G...

Page 188: ...n Slot System Property Site Location MIB Indicates the MIB info SysLocation setting in 27 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent reference only Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site PBX Region Indicates the region of the PBX reference only Value Range PBX Region Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 P...

Page 189: ... Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Data Version Indicates the version number of the data reference only Value Range 0000 0000 9999 9999 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site SRAM Version Indicates the version number of the SRAM reference only Value Range 000 999 Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 190: ...Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site PC Programming Manual References 7 3 5 Utility Log Call Control Log Option 9 Built in Communication Assistant 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 2 Applying logical partitioning P2P Group Specifies the peer to peer group of the site Value Range 1 32 Maintenance Cons...

Page 191: ...ion 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Installation Manual References 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard VoIP DSP Options The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks IP Extension Count of BGM Specifies how many IP PTs connected to the mother board can send out BGM Value Range 0 117 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot ...

Page 192: ...c Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site P2P Group Jitter Compensation Operation for G 711 FAX Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using the G 711 codec Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Jitter C...

Page 193: ...it for Voice Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications Value Range 1000 65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX C...

Page 194: ...tion 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications Value Range 1000 65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site DTMF Detection Level for G 711A Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G 711A codec Value Range...

Page 195: ... ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation Value Range 1 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specif...

Page 196: ...ension Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected for SIP extensions Value Range 20 n n 1 250 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter SIP Extension Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SIP ...

Page 197: ...13 2 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site T38 FAX Transmit Level Network to PBX Mu Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T 38 protocol packets when the codec used is G 711Mu Value Range 7 8 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site T38...

Page 198: ...024 64000 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Voice RTP UDP Port No IP PT SIP MLT Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP Real time Transfer Protocol data on the IP PT side This must be changed if another network application is using the same port For voice com...

Page 199: ...cation 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection CWMP HTTPS Port No for SIP MLT Specifies the HTTPS port of the PBX side ACS for control communication with KX UT series SIP phones Value Range 0 65535 Setting 0 will close port access for this feature Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configura...

Page 200: ...tion LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN Selecting 0 disables the 3rd Party CTI feature Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configurati...

Page 201: ...t connection status of the main port reference only Value Range 1 Disconnect 0 Connect Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Media Relay Common NAT External IP Address Specifies the NAT device external IP address common Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Sys...

Page 202: ...mote Connection IP Extension Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time s Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets Value Range 10 60 s Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection SIP Extension UT Extension NAT SIP Proxy Server Port No Specifies the outside faci...

Page 203: ...ons Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension NAT CWMP Server HTTP Port No for Network Survivability Specifies the outside facing HTTP port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections This setting specifies the port number used for the seconda...

Page 204: ...ng data to KX UT series SIP phones Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension NAT SIP MLT Data Download Server HTTPS Port No Specifies the outside facing HTTPS port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX UT ...

Page 205: ...le Remote Connection UT Extension Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time s Specifies the time interval between transmissions of Keep Alive packets Value Range 10 60 s Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension SIP Register Expire Time s Specifies the length of time that wil...

Page 206: ...en PERIODIC Ability is set to Enable Value Range 30 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Option NAT RTP IP Address Specifies the RTP server s IP address If using a separate IP address from Common NAT External IP Address configure this setting Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 25...

Page 207: ...enance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Option NAT CWMP Server IP Address for Network Survivability Specifies the outside facing IP address of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server for network survivability ...

Page 208: ...Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension SIP Location Hold Time Min Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions Value Range 10 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension S...

Page 209: ... MLT NAT CWMP Server IP Address Specifies the outside facing IP address or host name of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 IP address Max 100 characters host name Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned t...

Page 210: ... of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX UT series SIP phones Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT SIP MLT Data Download Server HTTPS Port No Specifies the outside f...

Page 211: ...ies the outside facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT NTP Server IP Address Specifies the outside facing IP address or host name of the network ...

Page 212: ... Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time s Specifies the time interval between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet Note This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router The default value is appropriate in most ...

Page 213: ...fied in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT is not available Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 IP address Max 100 characters host name Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters for Networking Survivability assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT CWMP Server HTTP Po...

Page 214: ...her alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Control Condition of Remote SIP MLT PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time s Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is...

Page 215: ...erty Site DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear ...

Page 216: ...alue Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site DSP Digital Gain Up on V SIPEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V SIPEXT card Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site DSP...

Page 217: ...n Up on TDM side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site DSP Digital Gain Down on TDM side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode ...

Page 218: ...nce Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site 218 PC Programming Manual 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site ...

Page 219: ...ne Card DHLC4 4 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card DLC16 16 Port Digital Extension Card MCSLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card EXP M Expansion Master Card for connecting Expansion units Maintenance Console Location 9 2 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Con...

Page 220: ...helf The Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Slot Type Indicates the type of card slot reference only Value Range Trunk Extension Maintenance Console Location 9 2 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX...

Page 221: ...e INS The card is in service OUS The card is out of service Fault The card is not communicating with the network Pre Install A card has been added to the slot Maintenance Console Location 9 2 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot PC Programming Manual 221 9 2 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Conf...

Page 222: ...gital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6...

Page 223: ...C enable for Rx signal Specifies whether AGC is activated or not for the Receive signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM AGC reference level for TX signal Specifies the AGC reference level for the Transmit signal Value Range 50 dBm 0 0 dBm 0 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configurat...

Page 224: ...nfiguration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM The maximum allowable AGC gain for RX signal Specifies the maximum allowable AGC gain for the Receive signal Value Range 0 dB 40 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM The minimum allowable AGC gain for RX signal Specifies the minimum allowable AGC gain for the Receive signal Value ...

Page 225: ... PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM SNS level for PCM to Packet path Specifies the SNS level for the PCM to Packet path Value Range 2 dB 20 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be...

Page 226: ...ion 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation Value Range 1 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the ...

Page 227: ...ance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM Maximum Continuous Tone Time Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call Value Range 1000 60000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM Unique Cyclic Tone Detection Specifies whether the system will...

Page 228: ...yclic tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call Value Range 1000 60000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM 228 PC Programming Manual 9 2 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property NSVM ...

Page 229: ...er is the number of IP PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone IP Proprietary Telephone activation key By default only IP softphones can be used You can click the Activation Key Installation link to access the Activation Key Installation screen see 7 6 Utility Activation Key Installation for installing activation keys Trial Activation Keys The PBX includes free trials for some PBX features t...

Page 230: ...ce Activation key for 3rd Party CTI link CSTA Multiplexer Activation key for CSTA Multiplexer Mobile Extension user Activation key for Mobile Extension users CA Basic No limit Activation Key for CA Basic Express CA Pro user Activation Key for CA Pro CA Supervisor user Activation Key for CA ICD Group Monitor CA Network Feature user Activation Key for CA network features CA Operator Console user Act...

Page 231: ...es the total number of channels or CA users provided by the mother board and activation key files in the System Memory reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 9 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Activation Key Status PC Programming Manual 231 9 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Activation Key Status ...

Page 232: ...ation 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting Number of IP Extensions Number of IP Extensions Max 128 UT UDT Specifies the required number of UT UDT extensions to install or remove V UTEXT32 cards Value Range 0 128 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting Number of IP Extensions Number of IP Extensions Max 128 SIP Phon...

Page 233: ... Maintenance Console Location 9 4 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting Number of IP Extensions Number of cards Max 4 V SIPEXT32 Indicates the number of installed V SIPEXT32 cards reference only Value Range 0 4 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting Number of IP Extensions Number of cards Max 4 ...

Page 234: ...IP telephones to the PBX Value Range Manual Full Automatic Extension Number Input Maintenance Console Location 9 4 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting 234 PC Programming Manual 9 4 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Ext Setting ...

Page 235: ...P Trunks Specifies the number of SIP Trunk to install V SIPGW16 cards Value Range 0 32 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Trunk Setting Account Setting User Name 64 characters Specifies the user name SIP Account provided by the SIP provider Value Range Max 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 4 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuratio...

Page 236: ...on Slot VoIP Property VoIP Trunk Setting Account Setting SIP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SIP proxy server This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server if provided by the SIP provider Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property ...

Page 237: ...waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to the repeated requests is received Value Range 90 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9 4 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Trunk Setting Property Setting From Header user Part Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP URI of the From header Value Range User Name Authentication ID PBX CLIP Main...

Page 238: ...mous sip anonymous anonymous invalid If Display name only is selected only the display name part of the From header will be displayed as Anonymous Example From Anonymous sip 1234 example com Maintenance Console Location 9 4 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot VoIP Property VoIP Trunk Setting Property Setting FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal Value Range ...

Page 239: ... Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configurat...

Page 240: ...o G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 ON Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal Value Range 20 5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Propert...

Page 241: ...tion 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property PC Programming Manual 241 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property ...

Page 242: ... of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating wi...

Page 243: ...s other than KX DT300 series KX DT500 series KX T7600 series APT SLT DSS Console UM VM Other CS High density CS IP CS SIP CS S PS Maintenance Console Location 9 7 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property Port Type View PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Total Count Indicates the total number of each type of telephone device and CS connected ...

Page 244: ...ration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT traversal method STUN A STUN Server used alongside the SIP Server finds out the global IP address of the router with NAT enabled Fixed IP Addr The global IP address of the router with NAT enabled is fixed Note Manual programming is optional except when programming is required depending on the network conditions Va...

Page 245: ...1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property NAT Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Specifies the interval time until the next Keep Alive packet is sent Note This interval must be shorter than the NAT binding time of the router The default value is appropriate in most cases Value Range 1 60 s Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property NAT Fixe...

Page 246: ...e Range 0 8 Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property STUN Resending Interval Specifies the length of time until a query is retried when no response is received from the STUN server Value Range 0 1600 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property SIP Called Party Number Check Ability Specif...

Page 247: ...ture only if the other device supports the feature Enable Passive Activates this feature only when requested by the other device Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Cons...

Page 248: ...IP accounts only Mode 2 Searches SIP accounts then DDI DID numbers Searches the SIP trunks of the tenant of the search matched DDI DID number in ascending order Low High Mode 3 Searches SIP accounts then DDI DID numbers Searches the SIP trunks of the tenant of the search matched DDI DID number in descending order High Low Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V ...

Page 249: ...ange 40 255 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property PC Programming Manual 249 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property ...

Page 250: ...ve Ability Specifies whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record Click Common Settings to change this setting Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Card Property 250 PC Programming Manual 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Card Property ...

Page 251: ... numbers are displayed in the list 2 From the Provider menu select the desired SIP provider 3 Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2 4 Click Execute 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual S...

Page 252: ...mplemented Provider Name and SIP Server IP Address in the Main tab will be set to match the selected Trunk Adaptor The User Name and Authentication ID in the Account tab will be set to the value specified in SIP Account User Name increased by 1 for each connection i e if 401 was specified User Name and Authentication ID for No 1 will be set to 401 and then for No 2 they will be set to 402 etc 12 I...

Page 253: ...tration information Additional channel for SlotN N 1 4 ChN N 1 16 The subordinate channel that uses the same registration information as a Basic channel for SIP sessions Select the Slot number and the Basic channel number to which the Additional channel belongs Not Used The channel is not in use Note The Basic channel and Additional channel can belong to different V SIPGW16 cards When you save the...

Page 254: ...of the SIP proxy server This setting is compulsory when not using the DNS server Note Specify the IP address of the outbound proxy server if provided by the SIP provider Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property SIP Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Main...

Page 255: ...Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Main P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P2P Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer to peer group s name reference only Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 C...

Page 256: ...k Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property User Name Specifies the user name SIP Account provided by the SIP provider Value Range Max 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Authentication ID Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server Val...

Page 257: ... Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Register Ability Specifies whether to send the REGISTER message to the SIP server Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Register Sending Interval Specifies the maximum length of interval time after which the PBX sends the REGIST...

Page 258: ...s is provided Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Registrar Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the SIP server Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Register Resending Interval s Specifies the interval time for r...

Page 259: ...0 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property STUN Server Name Specifies the domain name of a STUN server Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property STUN Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of the STUN server This setting is compulsory when the STUN method is selected and a DNS server is ...

Page 260: ...y Session Timer Ability Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP sessions by sending repeated requests Value Range Disable This feature is not activated Enable Active Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature Enable Passive Activates this feature only when requested by the other device Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW ...

Page 261: ...ying 0 will disable the timer Value Range 0 18000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property SIP 18x Response Timer s Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 18x response when establishing a connection between two parties Value Range 0 255 s Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Proper...

Page 262: ...and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Header Type Specifies the header of the SIP message in which the caller information is stored ...

Page 263: ...D PBX CLIP Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property P Preferred Identity Header SIP URI Specifies the complete SIP URI address of the P Preferred Identity header The configuration in P Preferred Identity Header User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration...

Page 264: ...rom header Specifies the format of the From header when not sending caller ID Value Range Display name and SIP URI Display name only Note If Display name and SIP URI is selected the display name part and the SIP URI of the From header will be displayed as Anonymous Example From Anonymous sip anonymous anonymous invalid If Display name only is selected only the display name part of the From header ...

Page 265: ...option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call number Value Range International International National Maintenance Console Location...

Page 266: ... an incoming call from a MEX enabled mobile device Value Range Max 7 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Voice FAX The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the ...

Page 267: ...9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Packet Sampling Time G 711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property...

Page 268: ...V SIPGW16 card However it is necessary to inform some carriers of this fact to avoid having calls disconnected Carriers can be informed by enabling this feature Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal Value Range G 711 Inband T 38 Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Con...

Page 269: ...e of RFC2833 for DTMF tones Note Manual programming is required if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property RTP RTCP The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connect...

Page 270: ...X Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property RTP QoS ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Value Range Normal Monetary Cost Reliability Throughput Delay Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 10...

Page 271: ...r Specifies the length of time to send Keep Alive packets for the connection Specifying 0 s will disable the sending of Keep Alive packets Value Range 0 s 10 s 20 s 30 s 40 s 50 s 60 s Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T 38 The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Referen...

Page 272: ...y Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T 38 protocol Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T 30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T 30 messages when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration...

Page 273: ...T Traversal packet type when sending or receiving faxes using the T 38 protocol Value Range Disable Blank UDP Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T 38 Option The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection ...

Page 274: ...BX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T38 FAX QoS ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when using the T 38 protocol Value Range Normal Monetary Cost Reliability Throughput Delay Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T38 FAX QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using t...

Page 275: ...he port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo cancell...

Page 276: ...Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Supplementary Service The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port cl...

Page 277: ...rty CLIR Specifies whether to allow restriction of the display of the CLIP number on the called party s telephone when making a SIP trunk call Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property CNIP Send Specifies whether to send the caller s name to be displayed on the called party s telephone when making a SIP trunk call Value Rang...

Page 278: ...erence For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communica...

Page 279: ...nge Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property PC Programming Manual 279 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property ...

Page 280: ...sable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received Value Range 5 60 s Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property RTP QoS Available Specifies the type of value to be sto...

Page 281: ...P Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property RTP QoS HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number Value Range 00 FF Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS Available Specifies the ...

Page 282: ...onfiguration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T 38 protocol This setting is compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadeci...

Page 283: ...ance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP...

Page 284: ...T QSIG CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Feature Guide References 4 2 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG QSIG CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Value Range No Yes Maint...

Page 285: ...subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialled Value Range 1 10 s Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Dial End Code Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of a dialled number Value Range 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Incoming Call Voice Activity...

Page 286: ...ype Value Range None G 711A G 711Mu G 729A Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Voice Codec Priority 3rd Specifies the third highest priority codec type Value Range None G 711A G 711Mu G 729A Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Packet Sampling Time for G 711A Specifies the time ...

Page 287: ...40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Va...

Page 288: ...on Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833 Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 272 512 ...

Page 289: ... the redundancy count for data when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T 38 protocol Value Range Transferred TCF Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Prop...

Page 290: ...uration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message Value Rang...

Page 291: ... Proceeding message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T316 Specifies the maximum time that t...

Page 292: ...ies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property T3D3 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configura...

Page 293: ...Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property PC Programming Manual 293 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property ...

Page 294: ...sisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property GK Settings Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 11 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property GK Settings 294 PC Programming Manual 9 11 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configu...

Page 295: ...cation 9 11 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Hunt Pattern Call Distribution Port Group 1st 16th Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority Value Range For 1st CDPG1 CDPG48 For 2nd 16th None CDPG1 CDPG48 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Hun...

Page 296: ... Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window For details about the Trunk Adaptor s Web Maintenance Console refer to the documentation of the Trunk Adaptor 6 Click OK Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in ...

Page 297: ...cted through the virtual VoIP gateway port Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Port Property Feature Guide References 4 2 2 3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual 297 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Port Property ...

Page 298: ...UDP Port No Server Specifies the UDP port used by the V IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Card...

Page 299: ...Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Card Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT First Resending Time PTAP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings a...

Page 300: ...Resending Time Out MGCP Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 75 120 s Maintenance Console Location 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Card Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Ec...

Page 301: ... IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Note For KX NT500 series phones in place of this setting the setting for DSP Digital Gain Up in 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property Main is applied Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Card Propert...

Page 302: ...ty Note For KX NT500 series phones in place of this setting the setting for NLP Setting in 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property Main is applied Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Card Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT 302 PC Programming Manual 9...

Page 303: ...4 Click Next 5 If the registration is still in progress the dialogue box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully registered the status of the IP PT will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP PT 1 Click De registration A dialogue bo...

Page 304: ...mber Specifies the extension number of the port Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configur...

Page 305: ...V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Phone Registration ID MAC Address Specifies the MAC address of the IP PT This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide ...

Page 306: ...P Group Specifies the peer to peer group of the IP PT Value Range 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9 2 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P2P Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer to peer group s nam...

Page 307: ...1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status To change t...

Page 308: ...4 Headset Operation C Waiting with Headset Selects the Call Waiting tone generating device when using a headset This setting is displayed when Headset ON is selected for Headset OFF ON Value Range PT Tone Headset Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Ringing Tone Selects the dua...

Page 309: ...nfiguration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Packet Sampling Time G 711 G 722 Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configura...

Page 310: ... 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Voice The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Value Range Max 5 digits consisti...

Page 311: ...guration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent out Value Range Inband Outband RFC2833 Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Payload Type Specifies the payload typ...

Page 312: ...ies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available...

Page 313: ...e same network as the PBX standard configuration Remote MRG The extension is accessing the PBX remotely use Media Relay Gateway Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 313 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property ...

Page 314: ...nitiation Protocol Extension DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Card Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenanc...

Page 315: ...n Protocol Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Card Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension PC Programming Manual 315 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT...

Page 316: ...he PBX While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension you can copy Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS and the programmer must be in On line mode Value Range 4 16 characters consisting of 0 9 a z A Z Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configur...

Page 317: ...SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension P2P Group Specifies the peer to peer group Value Range 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Main P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 P...

Page 318: ...Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 2 20 1 Message Waiting 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Option The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension ...

Page 319: ...he status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP...

Page 320: ...he transmitted sound Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Remote Place The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Co...

Page 321: ... column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Phone Locati...

Page 322: ... Copy to button This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS and the programmer must be in On line mode Value Range 4 16 characters consisting of 0 9 a z A Z Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Connection Indicates the port ...

Page 323: ... Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax signal Value Range No Speed Limit 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Pr...

Page 324: ...IP Session Initiation Protocol Extension T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T 30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T 30 messages when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Speci...

Page 325: ...thod when using the T 38 protocol Value Range Transferred TCF Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension PC Programming Manual 325 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property ...

Page 326: ...port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property Signalling MGCP UDP Port No IP CS Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data on the IP CS side reference only Value Range 2427 Maintenance Cons...

Page 327: ...k Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property First Resending Time PTAP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired ...

Page 328: ...re click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 75 120 s Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time Value Range OFF 64 ms 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Di...

Page 329: ...ole Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property PC Programming Manual 329 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Card Property ...

Page 330: ...w Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP CS is successfully registered the status of the IP CS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP CS 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered IP CSs are displayed on the left 2 Highlight IP CSs and ...

Page 331: ...Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Po...

Page 332: ...on number Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Port Property Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP CS Value Range None 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Port Property PC Programming Manual References 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Option T...

Page 333: ... Property IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data Value Range G 711 G 729A Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Port Property Packet Sampling Time G 711 Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of th...

Page 334: ... 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS Port Property 334 PC Programming Manual 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 ...

Page 335: ...he DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value R...

Page 336: ...nterval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to Enable Value Range 30 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property INFORM retransmission counter Specifies the number of times the PERIODIC Inform is sent for extensions when attempting to establish a connection Value Range 2 10 times Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configur...

Page 337: ...secondary PBX Note For SIP CSs primary PBX and secondary PBX settings must be made through the Web programming interface of the Master SIP CS or through configuration file programming For details refer to the documentation of the SIP CS Value Range 0 64 s Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Card Property PC Programming Manual 337 9 19 PBX Configuratio...

Page 338: ... 5 If the registration is still in progress the dialogue box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the device is successfully registered the status of the device will update to show Registered Note S PSs and SIP CSs will be automatically registered to the PBX after settings have been made via CS web pro...

Page 339: ...this button to be enabled you must specify the URL of the Super Master CS on the Utility CS Web Connection screen See 7 12 Utility CS Web Connection Main The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Value Range Max ...

Page 340: ...ntenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service O...

Page 341: ...ol Extension IP Phone Registration ID MAC Address Specifies the MAC address of the SIP phone S PS or SIP CS This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Note For S PSs and SIP CSs this value will be FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Fe...

Page 342: ...n 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension P2P Group Specifies the peer to peer group Value Range 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property PC Programming Manual References 11 10 PBX Configuration 3 10 Group P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P...

Page 343: ...sting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column ...

Page 344: ...n the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property UT Codec Priority 1st UT Codec Priority 4th Specifies the pr...

Page 345: ...1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Jitter Buffer Minimum Delay Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Value Range 1 2 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Jitter Buffer Initial Delay Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Value Range 1 7 ms Maintenance Console ...

Page 346: ... Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired ...

Page 347: ...or KX UT series SIP phones refer to the documentation of the phone Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection Protocol for Remote SIP MLT Specifies the protocol to use for remote SIP phone data communication HTTPS is strongly recommended for remote SIP MLT conn...

Page 348: ...Feature Guide References 5 2 2 3 Simple Remote Connection 348 PC Programming Manual 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT Port Property ...

Page 349: ...e 8 n n 3 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off hook signals from SLTs to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials Value Range 8 n n 12 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property SLT Pulse Max...

Page 350: ...guration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property Feature Guide References 2 13 3 Call Splitting Flash Timing Min Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property Flash Timing Range Specifies t...

Page 351: ...uration Slot Extension Card Property Feature Guide References 2 20 1 Message Waiting APT SLT Parallel Connection Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property Feature Guide References 2 11 10 Parallelled Telephone Ringing Start Mode of Extens...

Page 352: ...Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property 352 PC Programming Manual 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Card Property ...

Page 353: ...brid S Hybrid S DPT S Hybrid SLT IP EXT SIP MLT SIP ISDN UM Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property Telephone Type Indicates the connected telephone type reference only Value Range APT DPT DSS VM ISDN Extension IP PT UT SIP SIP CS S PS CS CS M CS S1 CS S2 CS S3 No Connection UNKNOWN Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 C...

Page 354: ... extension numbers This is called XDP Mode Off XDP disabled The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone s extension number This is called Parallel Mode Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property Feature Guide References 2 11 10 Parallelled Telephone 5 2 6 Extension Port Configuration Parallel Telephone Ringing Specifies ...

Page 355: ...d to the PBX VM DPT For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console For connecting a PC Console A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 26 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI DPT Type Location No Specifies the loc...

Page 356: ...PT Type Type on this screen is set to VM DPT Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group DPT Type Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS This setting is only available when DPT Type Type on this screen is set to Normal Value Range None 1 Maint...

Page 357: ... DPT This setting is displayed when Headset ON is selected for Headset OFF ON Value Range PT Tone Headset Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property Ringing Tone Selects the dual tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT DPT S DPT S Hybrid S Hybrid SLT or S Hybrid S DPT This setting...

Page 358: ...Value Range 0 5 n n 1 16 s Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not For outgoing trunk calls audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 359: ...Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Pulse DTMF Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1...

Page 360: ...ed pulse dial Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n n 3 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port High Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for a high...

Page 361: ...Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n n 3 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type PC Programming Manual References 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal ...

Page 362: ...nfiguration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Caller ID Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network Value Range 0 no limit 1 2 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Carrier Detection ...

Page 363: ...nable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Detection Start Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information aft...

Page 364: ...ects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code 2 Value Range None A B C D Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment o...

Page 365: ...e number used to identify each type of information code Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Header 03 Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal Value Range DDN Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Confi...

Page 366: ...ty LCO Port Installation Manual References 4 3 4 LCOT6 in KX NS500 installed by default Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode This option can only be changed when CO is selected for the Port Type Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The po...

Page 367: ...ne When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 6 5 ms 8 n n 1 112 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References 2 11 9 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk Value Range 80 m...

Page 368: ... Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References 2 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port PC Programming Manual References 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property L...

Page 369: ...nce Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References 2 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property ...

Page 370: ... request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type Feature Guide References 4 2 1 TIE Line Service ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 ...

Page 371: ...0 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T305 ...

Page 372: ...ave T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message Value Range 0 ...

Page 373: ...Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 ...

Page 374: ...quest to ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T301 Specifies the maximum time that...

Page 375: ...mum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PB...

Page 376: ...ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T310 Specifies the maximum time th...

Page 377: ...PRI type ISDN Extension T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX...

Page 378: ...on T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type 378 PC Programming Manual 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ...

Page 379: ...extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Guide References 4 1 2 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 4 2 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status To change the status...

Page 380: ...Port Property PRI Port CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check is an error checking control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder It is usually a 16 to 32 bit character Assignable only when using the PRI30 card Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Sl...

Page 381: ...available in On line mode Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Conf...

Page 382: ...nters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit s 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4 1 2 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY ISDN Centrex Enables the use of the telephone company s ISDN Centrex Service features Valu...

Page 383: ...ing call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Connec...

Page 384: ...work must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master...

Page 385: ...uration Slot Port Type Selects the port type Note Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connectin...

Page 386: ...ISDN VPN Calling Party Number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type ...

Page 387: ...e Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Type Selects the port type Note Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to publi...

Page 388: ... Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 4 1 2 6 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 4 1 2 7 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 4 1 2 9 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 4 2 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG 4 2 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 4 2 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG 4 2 4 5 Completion of Calls t...

Page 389: ... type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Guide References 4 1 2 9 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS PC Programming Manual 389 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Po...

Page 390: ...on 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Frame Option Selects the value for C bit and D bit Value Range C A D B C 0 D 0 C 0 D 1 C 1 D 0 C 1 D 1 Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type First Dial Timer TIE Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI DID or TIE line before sending the dialled digits to the telephon...

Page 391: ...27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type LIU Send Option Indicates the transmitting level Transmit Pulse Amplitude of LIU reference only Value Range Mode 1 Mode 8 Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 2...

Page 392: ... Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause Value Range 64 16 x n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type 392 PC Programming Manual 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type ...

Page 393: ...Console Location 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Bit Position for Dial Pulse Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit in a DR2 signal Value Range A bit B bit Maintenance Console Location 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the cle...

Page 394: ...s Value Range No Detection Meter pulses are not sent or received Outgoing call only Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls Both calls Sends and receives call charge meter pulses Maintenance Console Location 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References 2 29 1 E1 Line Service Meter Pulse Detection Bit Position Spec...

Page 395: ...Console Location 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting DSP Gain Adjustment DTMF Receive Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal Value Range 42 0 dB 11 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting DSP Gain...

Page 396: ...Maintenance Console Location 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Frame Error Detection Error Rate Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm To enable this setting Frame Error Detection Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes Value Range No limit 16 x n n 1 7 errors s Maintenance Co...

Page 397: ...pecifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI Value Range None 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 MFC R2 Timer Forward Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC R2 forward signal sent from the telephone company Value Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 398: ...aintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Group l Code Assignment ANI Complete 1 4 Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number Value Range ANI Complete 1 1 15 ANI Complete 2 4 Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Group l...

Page 399: ...l Code Assignment G ll Code Outgoing Call Specifies the code for sending Group ll code to the telephone company Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Group l Code Assignment G ll Code Incoming Call 1 15 Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group ll code respectively Value Range Undefi...

Page 400: ... Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 MFC R2 Group 1 E1 MFC R2 Group1 code Specifies the code value of the Group 1 code when the received Group 1 code is Value Range 11 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 400 PC Programming Manual 9 29 PBX Configuration ...

Page 401: ...nfiguration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Group A Code Assignment ANI N 1 Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Group A Code Assignment ANI N 1 Additional Code Specifies the second code when two...

Page 402: ...he code used to request the telephone company to send the N th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Group A Code Assignment N 1 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance...

Page 403: ...onfiguration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Group B Code Assignment Idle 2 Specifies the code used in special circumstances such as an international call to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Group B Co...

Page 404: ...on Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Group B Code Assignment Out of Service Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of service Value Range Und...

Page 405: ...eject Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 PC Programming Manual 405 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 ...

Page 406: ... Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range channel number Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection Indicates the channel status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired...

Page 407: ...m R2 Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References 2 29 1 E1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the E M channel Value Range Public Use the DIL DDI DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls Private Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuratio...

Page 408: ...alue Range DTMF MFC R2 Undefined Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References 2 29 1 E1 Line Service Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI DID number when receiving a call with the DDI DID number Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuratio...

Page 409: ... cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port Ans...

Page 410: ...pecial Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 x n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property E1 Port Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 9...

Page 411: ...will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Select the desired status Click INS to set the shelf to in service status Click OUS to set the shelf to out of service status To remove a Expansion Unit from the EXP M card 1 Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Delete The Expansion Unit will be deleted from the system and the corresponding ...

Page 412: ...rt Properties for cards installed in Expansion Units To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console click the desired cell in the Connection column and then select INS or OUS for the port 412 PC Programming Manual 9 32 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Expansion Unit1 Expansion Unit2 Expansion Unit3 ...

Page 413: ...Device Type Selects the type of connected output device for output ports only Value Range Ringer Relay Door Opener Maintenance Console Location 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property For Sensor Input Signal Decision Time Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call Value ...

Page 414: ...n n 1 255 s Maintenance Console Location 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property 414 PC Programming Manual 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property ...

Page 415: ...n Follow the steps below to de register the PS 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left 2 Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de registration Click Next A dialogue box will appear 3 Click Confirm If the de registration is successful the dialogue box will show De registration Succeed 4 Cl...

Page 416: ...ature Guide References 5 2 4 1 Portable Station PS Connection Extension No Specifies the extension number of the PS In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone PT SLT and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone However note that the PS extension number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the mai...

Page 417: ...le Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name Feature Guide References 5 2 4 1 Portable Station PS Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered reference only Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Location 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Feature Guide References 5 2 4 1 Portable Station PS Connection PC Programming Manual 417 9 34 PBX Confi...

Page 418: ... Status Display in Standby KX WT125 only Need System Restart Selects whether to display the CO status on the LCD of the PS when in stand by mode KX WT125 only Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 35 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option New Card Installation Card Status for any Card Selects the initial status of cards after installation Value Range In Service Out of Servi...

Page 419: ...Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 35 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option PC Programming Manual 419 9 35 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option ...

Page 420: ...ithout being connected through the telephone company assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source This enables all PBXs on the network to synchronise their timing Value Range None Shelf and Slot number Shelf ...

Page 421: ... amount of available DSP resources based on the installed DSP card reference only The number of resources provided by each type of DSP card is as follows DSP S card 63 DSP M card 127 DSP L card 254 One DSP card can be installed on the mother board Because the system reserves 2 resources for internal system functions the total amount of available esources indicated will be 2 less than the total res...

Page 422: ...rt Maintenance Console Location 9 37 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5 5 4 DSP Resource Usage Services Two way Recording Specifies the number of UM ports reserved in Services Unified message to use for Two way Recording Value Range 0 24 ports cannot exceed the value set in Services Unified message Maintenance Console Location 9 37 PBX Configuration 1 5 Con...

Page 423: ...4 DSP Resource Usage Services Free resources G 711 Indicates the amount of free DSP resources available to allocate reference only Value Range 0 506 DSP resources Maintenance Console Location 9 37 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource Feature Guide References 5 5 4 DSP Resource Usage Select a time to apply the set values Specifies when the settings made on this screen are applied Note A...

Page 424: ...lied at the specified date and time Apply now The changes are applied immediately Click OK to apply the settings immediately Maintenance Console Location 9 37 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource 424 PC Programming Manual 9 37 1 PBX Configuration 1 5 1 Configuration DSP Resource Setting ...

Page 425: ...he anticipated ratio of time the type of voice call function will be used 4 As values are entered the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for the input amounts Likewise the value for Free resources G 711 will decrease Note Click Clear to reset the input values and start again 5 When all items are allocated confirm that the amount of resources input does not ex...

Page 426: ...settings This screen can be accessed only in On line mode The graph displays DSP resource usage over time The time frame displayed can be displayed in increments of 1 hour 4 hours or 24 hours Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored Only DSP resources that have been reserved in 9 37 1 PBX Configuration 1 5 1 Configuration DSP Resource Setting are displayed 426 PC Programming Manual 9 37 2 PBX Con...

Page 427: ... 10 PBX Configuration 2 System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 427 ...

Page 428: ...ing the up down arrows beside the date and time Note When this setting is changed and applied it may take between 1 minute and several hours depending on the configuration of the PBX network for all connected IP PTs to reflect this change on their displays At default settings KX UT series SIP phones synchronise to the PBX s date and time once every hour Value Range Year 2000 2035 Month 01 12 Day 0...

Page 429: ...nables the PBX to automatically adjust its clock every day according to the time information provided by the network Value Range Disable ISDN Caller ID FSK SNTP Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5 5 5 Automatic Setup SNTP SNTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address or host name of the SNTP server Value Ran...

Page 430: ...ew time zone setting to take effect Value Range 14 00 14 00 Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5 5 5 Automatic Setup SNTP Time Zone Time Zone for PC Indicates the UTC Coordinated Universal Time time zone of the PC reference only Value Range 14 00 14 00 Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2...

Page 431: ...ylight Saving Daylight Saving PC Programming Manual References 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5 5 5 Automatic Setup Start Date Year Month Day Specifies the start date of daylight savings time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Savin...

Page 432: ... Location 10 1 2 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving PC Programming Manual References 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 5 5 5 Automatic Setup 432 PC Programming Manual 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving ...

Page 433: ...ce Settings Parameters Automated Attendant Operator Service Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM PC Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings ...

Page 434: ...e music source chosen for the Music on Hold or ringback tone Value Range Same as Music on Hold Ringback Tone Maintenance Console Location 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Feature Guide References 2 12 1 Call Transfer 434 PC Programming Manual 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM ...

Page 435: ... length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts Value Range 10 n n 1 120 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 6 3 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration x10s Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt This is the length of time tha...

Page 436: ...ength of time between going off hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 6 6 Hot Line Dial Extension First Digit s Specifies the length of time after going off hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be diall...

Page 437: ... s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial Analogue CO Inter digit s Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk If no digit is sent before this time expires the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller s voice over the analogue trunk Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance ...

Page 438: ...on Extension Settings Intercept No Answer Time Intercept No Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 2 1 1 5 Intercept Routing Recall Hold Recall s Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved Value Range 0 disable the Hold Recall 240 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 ...

Page 439: ... Value Range 1 240 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 13 2 Call Park Recall Disconnect after Recall x60s Specifies the length of time after a...

Page 440: ...eard when using a PT handset The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free s Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built in speaker of a PT in hands free mode ...

Page 441: ...e until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line Value Range 0 0 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 2 16 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA No Dial Intercept Timer s Specifies the length of time after...

Page 442: ... Break s Night s Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Ex...

Page 443: ...Selecting 0 enables the caller to prolong the trunk to trunk call without restriction Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 2 16 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Time x60s Specifies...

Page 444: ... Guide References 2 30 2 Outgoing Message OGM DISA Reorder Tone Duration s Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected If 0 is specified no reorder tone is sent and the call is disconnected immediately Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 13 3 2 P...

Page 445: ...nce Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Guide References 2 18 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Open Duration s Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension Value Range 2 7 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 Sys...

Page 446: ...tenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 24 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Alarm Ringing Duration x10s Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings Value Range 10 n n 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 24 4 Timed Reminder Unattended Conference Recall Start...

Page 447: ...onference Disconnect Timer s Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference Value Range 0 240 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 14 2 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ...

Page 448: ... five seconds followed by a 10 second pause then flashes again for five seconds Value Range 0 250 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 1 3 3 Call Waiting 2 10 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 2 19 1 Caller ID Extension PIN Lock Counter Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked A lo...

Page 449: ...k The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires Value Range 0 30 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 2 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Incoming Call Inter digit Timer TIE s Specifies the len...

Page 450: ...ation is lost Value Range 60 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Voice Mail Caller from VM to CO On hook Wait Time s Specifies the length of time from when the voice mail seizes a trunk for example to transfer a call until the voice mail goes on hook I...

Page 451: ...em Timers Counters During Conversation Pause Signal Time s Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Guide References 2 5 4 7 Pause Insertion System Wireless PS Out of Range Timer s When the destination of an incoming cal...

Page 452: ...ension Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 2 16 3 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Dial Tone Continuous Time s Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an extension are finished playing Value Range 1 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programmin...

Page 453: ...nance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters PC Programming Manual References 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Conference Group Call Operation 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Operation 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Feature Guide References 2 15 1...

Page 454: ...or deleting time blocks click Time Setting 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week for the selected Time Table as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time...

Page 455: ...be set when 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting Feature Guide References 5 1 3 Tenant Service 5 1 4 Time Service 2 Break Break 1 3 End Hour Minute Specifies the end time for each break period Times can only be set when 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value ...

Page 456: ...5 1 4 Time Service 456 PC Programming Manual 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting ...

Page 457: ...iday Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Setting Feature Guide References 5 1 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date Month Specifies the month of the holiday start date Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5...

Page 458: ...le Location 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table End Date Month Day Feature Guide References 5 1 4 Time Service Holiday Table End Date Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date Value Range 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table PC Programming Manual Re...

Page 459: ...Feature Guide References 5 1 4 Time Service PC Programming Manual 459 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table ...

Page 460: ...o affect the following settings Extension Number as set in User Profiles and UM Configuration Mailbox Number when set to synchronise with Extension Number settings However Mailbox Number synchronisation depends on the setting 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 9 Extension Mailbox Setting Mailbox Number Synchronization with Extension Number Value Range Max 3 digits consisting o...

Page 461: ...ure number used to call the operator Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Feature Guide References 5 1 5 Operator Features Idle Line Access Local Access Specifies the feature number...

Page 462: ...CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Guide References 4 2 1 TIE Line Service Redial Specifies the fea...

Page 463: ...ature Guide References 2 6 4 Speed Dialling Personal System Personal Speed Dialling Programming Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 6 4 Speed Dialling Personal System DOORPHONE Cal...

Page 464: ...n Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to turn on or off the external BGM Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Manager Ma...

Page 465: ...ion 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parallel Telephone Ring Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when receiving an incoming call Note This feature is restr...

Page 466: ...ing of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Call Pickup TAFAS Answer Spec...

Page 467: ... 2 17 1 Paging Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 10 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on User Remote Operation Walking COS Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to...

Page 468: ... 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Feature Guide References 5 2 4 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maint...

Page 469: ...bering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 13 1 Call Hold Call Park Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 13 2 Call Park Hold Retrieve Specified wit...

Page 470: ...ences 2 18 2 Door Open External Relay Access Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Guide References 2 18 4 External Relay Control External Feature Acce...

Page 471: ...s the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 4 1 2 5 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN COLR Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR which suppresses the p...

Page 472: ...lementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 4 2 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Switch CLIP of CO Line Extension Specifies the feature number used t...

Page 473: ...ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX or confirm the FWD setting Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 4 1 2 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Me...

Page 474: ...r used to set or cancel FWD DND for incoming trunk calls Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 Call Forwarding ...

Page 475: ...4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD Group FWD Set Cancel Call from CO Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console ...

Page 476: ...or incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Call...

Page 477: ...ifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 24 3 Walking Extension Features Data Line Security Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security i e preventing signals ...

Page 478: ...coming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 1 3 3 Call Waiting Executive Override Deny Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override i e preventing other extensions from joining your conversation Value Range Max ...

Page 479: ... Log in Log out Log in Log out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 2...

Page 480: ...Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start s Feature Guide References 2 6 6 Hot Line Absent Message Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Abse...

Page 481: ...l Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely Wake up Call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 24 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder Value Range Max 4 digits consisti...

Page 482: ...sing the Extension Dial Lock feature Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 7 3 Extension Dial Lock Time Service Day Lunch Break Night Switch Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to change the time mode manually Value Range Max 4 digits consisting ...

Page 483: ...mote Extension Dial Lock On Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to lock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Manager...

Page 484: ... PIN Dial Information CTI Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 26 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Conference Group Call Operation Specifies the feature number used to make a ...

Page 485: ...enance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main PC Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Guide References 4 2 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 486: ...mbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed Dial Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 ...

Page 487: ... 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Message Key Phone Number Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE key on the KX T7710 is pressed By default this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX T7710 is set to...

Page 488: ... consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main 488 PC Programming Manual 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main ...

Page 489: ...gits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 2 PBX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering Plan Quick Dial Feature Guide References 2 6 5 Quick Dialling 4 2 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 5 5 7 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 ...

Page 490: ...Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Feature Guide References 2 1 3 3 Call Waiting 2 3 3 Do Not Disturb DND 2 10 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 2 10 4 4 Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override Specifies the feature number used to interru...

Page 491: ...e Waiting Set Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Feature Guide References 2 20 1 Message Waiting Call Monitor Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension s conversation Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Co...

Page 492: ...ting or call an extension in DND mode This is the same setting as BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override on this screen and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features This can be useful for example if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering...

Page 493: ... 1 1 Class of Service COS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring level for making trunk calls in each time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Ser...

Page 494: ...n Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 15 1 PBX Configuration 7 1 TRS Denied Code 15 2 PBX Configuration 7 2 TRS Exception Code Feature Guide References 2 7 3 Extension Dial Lock TRS Level for System Speed Dialling Specifies the TRS Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers which overrides ...

Page 495: ...all duration can be set using Extension CO Duration Time 60s on 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 2 Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call 11 1 1 PBX C...

Page 496: ...uration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide ...

Page 497: ... 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Assistant COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10 ...

Page 498: ...amming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 3 Do Not Disturb DND OHCA Whisper OHCA Enabl...

Page 499: ... 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Recall Transfer Recall s Feature Guide References 2 12 1 Call Transfer Automatic Answer Caller Enables a caller to have calls automatically answered when the destination has set Hands free Answerback Value Range Disable Even if the destination has set Hands free Answerback...

Page 500: ...ings Main COS Feature Guide References 2 10 3 Call Monitor Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three party conference call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Mai...

Page 501: ...rd Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group Value Range Disable An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group Enable All An extension can set call forwarding for all groups Enable Group An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of...

Page 502: ...OS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 5 5 3 PT Programming Manager Specifies the authorisation to use manager features Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired E...

Page 503: ...control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 5 1 1 Class of Service COS SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook Value Range Enhanced DSS...

Page 504: ...er PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 2 9 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension O...

Page 505: ...or Open External Relay Access Enables access to external relays Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Guide References 2 18 4 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA Val...

Page 506: ... System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 2 7 5 Walking COS Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS Value Range Allow D...

Page 507: ...tings PC Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings CA CA ICD Group Log Out Feature Guide References 2 26 2 CA Communication Assistant CA ICD Group Log Out Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant CA Client Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service...

Page 508: ...sole Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Ring Duration s 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Conference Group Call Operation 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Feature Guide References 2 15 1 Co...

Page 509: ...Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings PC Programming Manual 509 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings ...

Page 510: ...intenance Console Location 10 7 2 PBX Configuration 2 7 2 System Class of Service External Call Block PC Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Featu...

Page 511: ...com calls are blocked Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 10 7 3 PBX Configuration 2 7 3 System Class of Service Internal Call Block PC Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main COS 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 ...

Page 512: ...ing trunk calls Value Range Single Double Triple Option1 Option2 Maintenance Console Location 10 8 1 PBX Configuration 2 8 1 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO PC Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Trunk Group Number 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configu...

Page 513: ...Single Double Triple S Double Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 10 8 2 PBX Configuration 2 8 2 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from DOORPHONE PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 13 1...

Page 514: ...iguration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Timed Reminder Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 10 8 3 PBX Configuration 2...

Page 515: ...References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table External Sensor Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console ...

Page 516: ...igned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature Value Range 12H 24H Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 24 4 Timed Reminder PT LCD Password PIN Display Selects whether passwords and PINs Personal Identification Number are hidden or shown on the displays of extensions while being entered Value Range Hide Display Mainten...

Page 517: ...d Value Range On Solid Red on Flash Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY 2 21 3 LED Indication PT F...

Page 518: ...o Not Page Page Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging PT Operation Off Hook Monitor Enables the use of Off Hook...

Page 519: ...n progress can be joined Executive Busy Override simply by pressing the S CO button Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 10 2 Executive Busy Override PT Operation JOG Dial Speed Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used Value Range Normal High Speed Maintenance Cons...

Page 520: ...on 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Hands free Answerback PT Operation Automatic Hold by ICM CO ICD Group Key Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM PDN CO or ICD Group button is pressed while having a conversation Value Range Disable Disconnect Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manua...

Page 521: ...hen Extension Feature Clear is performed Value Range Clear Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 24 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear Fwd DND Specifies whether the FWD DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed Value Range Clear Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configurat...

Page 522: ... Configuration 2 9 System System Options CODEC Priority Notification from SIP Network for Incoming Call Specifies whether the priority notification from the SIP network is used in place of the PBX s codec priority for SIP trunks Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode Specifies whethe...

Page 523: ... a pre programmed time period Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration x10s Feature Guide References 2 6 3 Last Number Redial Redial Automatic Redial for Analogue CO Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analo...

Page 524: ...edial Redial Call Log by Redial key Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a display PT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 6 3 Last Number Redial Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call Selects whether the time limit for extension to trunk calls a...

Page 525: ...destinations to continue after the originator of the conference has left the conference Value Range Enable The call will be disconnected Disable The call will continue Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 14 2 Conference 4 2 5 QSIG Enhanced Features Applying logical partitioning Enables the Logical Partitioning feature If you sele...

Page 526: ...Restricted PBX Area ID a Extension PBX Area ID b PBX Private Line TIE to TIE Restricted Private Line 3 CO to TIE calls PBX PBX Legacy Trunk IP Trunk Private Line CO to TIE Restricted 4 Conference calls that include legacy trunks and IP trunks Legacy Trunk IP Trunk PBX Restricted Conf Extension You can check the programming status and call restriction status of Logical Partitioning in 7 3 5 Utility...

Page 527: ...or logical partition Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice calling mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 18 1 Doorphone Call 2 25 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone ...

Page 528: ...bles the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3 2 Confirmation Tone 3 2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by for example the Call Pickup feature Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 25 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4 1 Co...

Page 529: ...nsion when it holds a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 25 2 Confirmation Tone Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 S...

Page 530: ...tions PC Programming Manual References 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port 16 1 PBX Configuration 8 1 ARS System Setting Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 25 1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel Conference Enables the use of echo cancelling for conference calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System...

Page 531: ... Enable echo cancelling is used for extension to ISDN line calls If set to Disable echo cancelling is not used for extension to ISDN line calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 DSS Key DSS key mode for Incoming Call Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group Value ...

Page 532: ...g DSS Key DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash Value Range Disable The DSS button will light up when a call arrives but pressing it will not pick up the call Enable The DSS button will flash when a call arrives and pressing it will pick up the call Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Call P...

Page 533: ...te network to be considered as a call from a public network Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network to have the same leading number For example extension 101 is registered at PBX 1 and extension 102 is...

Page 534: ...he origin of a trunk call Value Range Disable The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent Enable The CLIP number of the calling party is sent Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation ...

Page 535: ...6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information such as Caller ID is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS i e a PS with one or more PDN buttons when a call is received while delayed ringing is set Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manual Refe...

Page 536: ...ode 3 Mode 4 Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 13 1 Call Hold SLT Message Waiting Lamp Pattern Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 20 1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA for SLT Enables the u...

Page 537: ... for Analogue CO Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected preventing that trunk from being used Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out ISDN Voice Path Connection Connect when Alert is sent from ISDN Enables the voice path of an...

Page 538: ...n 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options ISDN Option Calling Party Name Sending Format Specifies the sending format of the calling party name when making a call to the ISDN network Value Range Display Facility Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 6 CTI Built in Communication Assistant System status retry interval timer Specifies the length ...

Page 539: ...ntil the alive check is retried when no response is received for Third Party Call Control CTI Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 26 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd Party CTI System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI When...

Page 540: ...n attempted the programmed number times the association is released automatically Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 26 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI CTI Make Call SLT Ring Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI instead of the SLT Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 541: ...tion 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 19 2 Incoming Call Log Incoming Call Log Fwd All Fwd Busy Specifies whether the following types of calls are recorded in the incoming call log of the original destination Calls rerouted via the FWD All Calls feature Calls rerouted via the FWD Busy feature If this setting is enabled calls are recorded as Not Answered Value Range Enable Not A...

Page 542: ...all Specifies whether extension TIE calls are recorded in the calling extension s outgoing call log Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 2 6 3 Last Number Redial Option 8 P2P Group Priority Voice 1 Priority Voice 2 Priority Voice 3 Specifies the order of priority of the codecs to use for P2P groups Value R...

Page 543: ...led between SIP trunks and IP extensions Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Conference Group Maximum Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call Specifies the maximum number of participants that can speak during a Conference Group Call Value Range 8 Party 32 Party ...

Page 544: ...Feature Guide References 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Mailbox Setting Mailbox COS Synchronization with Extension COS Enables the synchronisation of a user s Ext COS setting and Mailbox COS setting Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manual References 8 1 Users User Profiles 12 1 1 PBX Configura...

Page 545: ...nel Seizure Signal Bits Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range 10 n n 3 40 bits Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range 10 n n 3 40...

Page 546: ...ocation 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Confi...

Page 547: ... References 2 19 1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier Long Distance if received from the trunk when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level for MCSLC Card Specifi...

Page 548: ...nance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID 548 PC Programming Manual 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings ...

Page 549: ...onfiguration 3 4 Group Paging Group Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging Paging Paging Level from PT Speaker Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT Value Range 15 dB 12 dB 9 dB 6 dB 3 dB 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH PC Programming Manual References 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Pagi...

Page 550: ...ic BGM External MOH MOH 3 8 Music on Hold 3 8 Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1 6 MOH 3 8 Value Range 31 5 31 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH PC Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Feature Guide References 2 13 4 Music on Hold 2 30 1 Background Music BGM 550 PC Programming Manu...

Page 551: ...X Value Range 31 5 31 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain Card Down Gain From PBX Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card Value Range 15 5 15 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain Card PC Programming Manual 551 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain C...

Page 552: ...552 PC Programming Manual 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain Card ...

Page 553: ...n 11 PBX Configuration 3 Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 553 ...

Page 554: ...guration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings COS Specifies the COS of the trunk group applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line Service If you wish to prevent such calls from being made ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of 7 assigned for all relevant time modes in 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Value Range 1 64 M...

Page 555: ...ecifies the length of time that a trunk to trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected Value Range None 1 60 60 s Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Extension CO Duration Time 60s Spec...

Page 556: ...Programming Manual References 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Dialling Plan Table Specifies the table to be used for en bloc dialling Value Range 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings PC Programming ...

Page 557: ... CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2 16 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Tone Detection Continuous Enables the disconnection of a DISA originated trunk to trunk call by continuous signal detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Option...

Page 558: ...to trunk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 16 3 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Continuous Enables the disconnection of an SVM originated trunk to trunk call by continuous signal ...

Page 559: ...M Host PBX Access Code Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings PC Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Host PBX Access Code 1 10 Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the...

Page 560: ...PBX to automatically reject collect calls This setting is only for users in Brazil Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Collect Call Reject for Brazil Wait Time Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call This setting is only for users in Brazil Value Range 500 ...

Page 561: ...e 1000 ms 1500 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings PC Programming Manual 561 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings ...

Page 562: ... the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority Value Range Trunk Group No 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 11 1 2 PBX Configuration 3 1 2 Group Trunk Group Local Access Priority PC Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2 5 5 3 Trunk Acce...

Page 563: ...rogrammed Each trunk group can select a table for use Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here the PBX applies the Long Distance Code settings to the modified number Area Code for Local International Call Data 1 10 Specifies the leading number area code to look for in the incoming caller s number Value Range Max ...

Page 564: ...This modification is applied to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits for National the caller s nu...

Page 565: ...xceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Value Range Max 8 digits 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Added Number for National Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits for National but ...

Page 566: ... References 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller s number in the place of the removed d...

Page 567: ...Feature Guide References 2 19 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 567 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification ...

Page 568: ...Assign Leading Number Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P 0 1 and X 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialling Plan PC Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO First Dig...

Page 569: ...digits Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 4 1 2 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY PC Programming Manual 569 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialling Plan ...

Page 570: ...ue Range Type A 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type B 1 N11 2 NNX XXXX 3 1NPX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type C 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NNX XXXX 4 1NPX NXX XXXX 5 50 Not stored Type D 1 47 Not stored 48 N11 49 NXX XXXX 50 1NXX NXX XXXX Type E 1 N11 2 NXX NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Maintenance Console Location 11 1 4 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialling Pla...

Page 571: ...e Rate Rate Specifies the call charge rate The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 11 1 5 PBX Configuration 3 1 5 Group Trunk Group Charge Rate PC Programming Manual References 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature ...

Page 572: ...ickup Group 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group Feature Guide References 5 1 2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 573: ...ttings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Call Pickup 5 1 2 Group Pickup Group 1st 8th Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen To assign an extension user group to more than 8 call pickup groups click A...

Page 574: ...n Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Call Pickup 5 1 2 Group User Group 1 32 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 11 3 1 PBX Configuration 3 3 Group Call Pickup Group All Setting PC Programming Manual Refere...

Page 575: ...erences 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging 5 1 2 Group Paging Group 1st 8th Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen To assign an...

Page 576: ...5 1 2 Group 576 PC Programming Manual 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group ...

Page 577: ...n Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging 5 1 2 Group User Group 1 32 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF white Maintenance Console Location 11 4 1 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group All Setting PC Programming Manual Reference...

Page 578: ...gs 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging 5 1 2 Group External Pager 1 6 Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 11 4 2 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group External Pager PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configurati...

Page 579: ...Guide Main Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 580: ...e No Ring Ring Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution DND Mode Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ...

Page 581: ... 6 Feature Tenant Music On Hold Feature Guide References 2 13 4 Music on Hold 5 1 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group Depending on the COS calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature Also when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk the TRS Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distributio...

Page 582: ... digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Queuing Busy Destination Day Lunch Break Night...

Page 583: ...distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Time out M...

Page 584: ... Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 2 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Hurry up Level Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the Hurry up button Value Range None 1 30 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Inc...

Page 585: ...on Group Group Settings Queuing Time Table Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode Value Range None Table 1 Table 64 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Feature Guide References 2 2 2 4 Queuing Featur...

Page 586: ...ge Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method Value Range None 10 n n ...

Page 587: ...t an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Last Extension Log out Specifies whether the last extension logged in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out Value Range Di...

Page 588: ...X Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Programmed Mailbox No 16 Digits Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5...

Page 589: ...PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 2 Incoming Call Log Group FWD Call from CO Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call...

Page 590: ...l Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD Group FWD Call from Extension Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group...

Page 591: ...select the group and click OK Extension Number Specifies the extension number of each member In addition to the extension numbers of PT SLT and PS extensions floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List PC P...

Page 592: ... on is set to ICD Group Member in 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 10 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wr...

Page 593: ...nt sequence Wait 5 n n 1 16 s If preceded by an OGM plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time if not preceded by an OGM sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time OGM 01 64 Sends a certain OGM Queue No Announces how many calls precede the caller in the waiting queue Queue No and Time Announces how many calls precede the caller in the waiting queue and the estimated wait ...

Page 594: ... are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Options ICD Group Key Mode Selects whether ICD Group butto...

Page 595: ... Settings Member List becomes unavailable If ICD Group Member is selected Wrap up Timer on 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings and 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings become unavailable Value Range Extension The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension including a retrieved call on hold ICD Group Me...

Page 596: ...uilt in ACD Report This feature requires an activation key Value Range Enable Logging Disable Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Options ICD Group Call Monitor View Screen Update Time s Specifies the screen update interval time for the ICD...

Page 597: ...ated Waiting Time Threshold Time for Special Announce 10 60 min Specifies the threshold wait time for when calls waiting in an ICD group queue will hear the special announcement Value Range 10 60 min Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Options UM System Guidance UM System G...

Page 598: ...ect it and then click the left arrow button 3 Click OK The ACD supervisor selected above is displayed as follows First Name The first name of the ACD supervisor reference only Last Name The last name of the ACD supervisor reference only Ext No The extension number of the ACD supervisor reference only To assign the ICD Groups that are monitored by the ACD Supervisor 1 In the ICD Group column click ...

Page 599: ... 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Hunting Group Name Specifies the name of the hunting group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Hunting Type Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group Value Range Circular Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed Term...

Page 600: ...e Console Location 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 600 PC Programming Manual 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group ...

Page 601: ...iguration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 6 1 PBX ...

Page 602: ...guration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Feature Guide References 2 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview UM Ports and the UM Group Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the Unified Messaging system when a call is redirected to the UM group by Intercept Routing When the Unified Messaging syst...

Page 603: ...l to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the Unified Messaging system in these situations 1 when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant AA service of the Unified Messaging system and the call is not answered within a programmed time period 2 when the Unified Messag...

Page 604: ...tion 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Feature Guide References 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview UM Ports and the UM Group Group Name Specifies the name of the UM group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the UM group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 605: ...7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Extension No Indicates the extension number assigned to the UM port reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 7 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Feature Guide Referen...

Page 606: ...Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Feature Guide References 5 2 4 2 PS Ring Group Incoming Trunk Call Information Dis...

Page 607: ...Feature Guide References 5 2 4 2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual 607 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group ...

Page 608: ... 11 8 1 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 5 2 4 2 PS Ring Group Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 8 1 PBX Confi...

Page 609: ...e Group Feature Guide References 2 15 1 Conference Group Call Broadcast Mode Specifies whether only the original caller can speak or up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference group call Value Range Disable The original caller and up to 7 participants can speak at the start of a conference group call Enable Only the original caller can speak at the start of a conference group call Maint...

Page 610: ...atically answer a conference group call even if Hands free Answerback is not set for those extensions This setting can be used with PTs and KX TCA175 KX TCA275 KX TCA185 KX TCA285 KX TCA385 PSs Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group PC Programming Manual References 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Broadcast Mode Fe...

Page 611: ...ber of the conference group Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 9 1 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Feature Guide References 2 15 1 Conference Group Call Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is ...

Page 612: ...0 Group P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Bandwidth Control Specifies whether to use the bandwidth precedence setting of the P2P group for calling among different P2P groups Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 10 PBX Configuration 3 10 Group P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P2P Connection 612 PC Programming Manual 11 10...

Page 613: ...Extension Port Property Feature Guide References 2 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM DPT group by Intercept Routing When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disab...

Page 614: ...oup Features Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations 1 when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant AA service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a programmed time period 2 when the VPS is assigned as the Transf...

Page 615: ...nit Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DPT group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DPT group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 11...

Page 616: ...ccess 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Other PBX Extension Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 4 2 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Group Name Specifies the name of the centralised VM DPT group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DPT group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 617: ... 1 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 11 2 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 11 11 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 11 2 PBX Co...

Page 618: ...T Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group VM Port No Indicates the VM port number for the port reference only Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 11 11 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 11 2 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2 28 1 V...

Page 619: ... 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 11 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 11 2 PBX Configuration 3 11 2 Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 2...

Page 620: ...nance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal Reorder T...

Page 621: ...t or cancelled on an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal Disconnect Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Conf...

Page 622: ...up VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Command Recording Message Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded intercepted or transferred to the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 H mailbox number and P pause Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group Sys...

Page 623: ...ocation 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings Timing DTMF Length for VM Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings Timing Inter digit Time Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value R...

Page 624: ... of the VM DTMF group are busy Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Others FWD to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS so that the VPS can ans...

Page 625: ...ange Extension Number Programmed Mailbox Number Maintenance Console Location 11 12 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 1 Group VM DTMF Group System Settings PC Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Ex...

Page 626: ...Configuration 3 12 2 Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice Mail VM Group Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DTMF group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DTMF group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 12 2 PBX Configuration 3 12 2 Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 28 1 Voice...

Page 627: ...Feature Guide References 2 28 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual 627 11 12 2 PBX Configuration 3 12 2 Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings ...

Page 628: ...ntenance Console Location 11 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 12 2 Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List PC Programming Manual References 11 12 2 PBX Configuration 3 12 2 Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 28 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 12 ...

Page 629: ... PBX Configuration 4 Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 629 ...

Page 630: ...m are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extensi...

Page 631: ...nnected SIP General SIP Extension is connected S PS SIP Portable Station is connected SIP CS SIP Cell Station is connected CS M High density CS is connected with its master port CS S1 3 High density CS is connected with its slave port No Connection No telephone is connected UNKNOWN SLT is connected or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX...

Page 632: ... of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently To change an Extension PIN 1 Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change 2 In the window that appears enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it 3 Click OK Value Ran...

Page 633: ...usy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destinatio...

Page 634: ...tion 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept No Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode When this setting is set to 0 the system timer is used Value Range 0 240 s Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Set...

Page 635: ...call Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID...

Page 636: ...ation 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extensi...

Page 637: ...ng system Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 3 2 2 30 Two way Record Two way Transfer Option 1 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired...

Page 638: ... One numbered Extension 5 2 4 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 8 1 PBX Configuration 2 8 1 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO 10 8 2 PBX Configuration 2 8 2 S...

Page 639: ...temised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Guide References 2 7 6 Verification Code...

Page 640: ...s Feature Guide References 2 1 3 3 Call Waiting 2 10 4 1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Automatic C Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk doorphone calls and calls via an incoming call distribution group Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Fea...

Page 641: ...Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 6 6 Hot Line Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Setting...

Page 642: ...ation 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 ...

Page 643: ...999 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 7 2 Budget Management Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls When Deny Voice Call is selected the extension will always ring when receiving calls regard...

Page 644: ...seized or for a PDN extension an idle PDN button is selected F 1 F 84 A trunk programmed for a flexible button F 1 F 84 is seized A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Ext...

Page 645: ... Guide References 2 4 2 Line Preference Incoming Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension Value Range CW Tone 1 CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 10 4 2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the mes...

Page 646: ... the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Display Language Selects th...

Page 647: ...enance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 21 4 Display Information Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Automatic Answer for CO Call Enables the extension to a...

Page 648: ...Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls both intercom and trunk calls without going off hook regardless of the Hands free Answerback setting Value Range Off ...

Page 649: ...ng tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Display Lock SVM Lock Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log display i e specifies whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log information at the extension ...

Page 650: ...nsion Extension Settings Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters Value Range Table 1 Standard mode Table 2 Option mode Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL button during a trunk conversation Value Range EFA Termin...

Page 651: ...extension s Outgoing Call Log memory Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 6 3 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode When Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension s telephone type as follows PT Speech SLT Audio Value Rang...

Page 652: ...coming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on hook for the previous call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Caller ID Sending Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range Disabl...

Page 653: ...onsole Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 20 1 Message Waiting Wrap up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to Ex...

Page 654: ...calls to a PDN extension an extension with one or more PDN buttons Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 9 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Built in Communication Assistant Specifies whether to enab...

Page 655: ...tures SUMMARY FWD DND Call Forwarding FWD and Do Not Disturb DND settings for each extension can be referred FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Config...

Page 656: ...ing of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range...

Page 657: ...WD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD Keep ...

Page 658: ...xtension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD 658 PC Programming Manual 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings ...

Page 659: ... References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 660: ... 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 ...

Page 661: ...Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP PC Programming Manual 661 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings ...

Page 662: ...ocation 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting bec...

Page 663: ...ng Directory shown on the extension s display Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 3 PBX Configuration 4 1 3 Extension Wired Extension Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2 6 4 Speed Dialling Personal System Speed Dialling Personal Number Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret...

Page 664: ...on those settings will not be copied For more information on flexible buttons see 2 21 2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide Once flexible buttons have been programmed the Terminal Label Print utility can be used to print label sheets which can be attached to extension telephones for quick reference For details see 1 2 2 1 Editing and Printing Terminal Labels in Off line Mode To access the Super...

Page 665: ...runk Access Parameter Selection for Group CO Specifies the trunk group to be accessed Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Call Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range ...

Page 666: ...nge All Day Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5 1 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change Specifies the TRS Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension Value Range Level 1 Level 7 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4...

Page 667: ...erences 2 9 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Extension Number for DSS Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Extension Number for ICD Group Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call dis...

Page 668: ...on 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Extension Number for Group Fwd External Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configur...

Page 669: ... Number for Log in Log out Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log in to or log out from Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 2 2 7 Log in Log out Extension Number for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of...

Page 670: ...guration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the UM VM DTMF DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration...

Page 671: ...sion Flexible Button Dial for One touch Specifies the number to be dialled The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 One touch Dialling buttons for extensions Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 6 2 One touch Dialling Dial for ISDN ...

Page 672: ...h flexible button for KX NT366 and KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 IP PTs and KX UT248 and KX UT670 SIP MLTs The name specified here is displayed on the LCD for each button Value Range Max 12 characters Note The maximum length for KX UT248 and KX UT670 labels is 10 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2...

Page 673: ...een set to Specific is pressed Value Range Park 00 Park 99 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 13 2 Call Park Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One touch Two way Transfer For example a secretary can record a...

Page 674: ...tensions can be selected To select all extensions at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy PC Programming Manual References 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Exten...

Page 675: ...ne touch access Value Range Not Stored One Touch Maintenance Console Location 12 1 5 PBX Configuration 4 1 5 Extension Wired Extension PF Button Feature Guide References 2 21 2 Flexible Buttons Dial Specifies the number to be dialled Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 12 1 5 PBX Configuration 4 1 5 Extension Wired Extensio...

Page 676: ...a is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 12 1 6 PBX Configuration 4 1 6 Extension Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send PC Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Netwo...

Page 677: ...ed Extension CLIP ID Table Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 7 PBX Configuration 4 1 7 Extension Wired Extension CLIP ID Table CLIP 1 8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the extension Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 7 PBX Configuration 4 1 7 Extension Wired...

Page 678: ... Maintenance Console Location 12 1 8 PBX Configuration 4 1 8 Extension Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 1 8 PBX Configuration 4 1 8 Extension Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12 1 8...

Page 679: ... 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Name Simplified Voice Message Specifies whether to enable the Simplified Voice Message feature Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 8 PBX Configuration 4 1 8 Extension Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that ...

Page 680: ... more details Main Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range...

Page 681: ...the COS of the PS Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 5 1 1 Class of Service COS Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be ...

Page 682: ... Personal Identification Number PIN Intercept Destination Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name S...

Page 683: ...Destination Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy Feature Guide References 2 1 1 5 Intercept Routing Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension S...

Page 684: ... each time mode When this setting is set to 0 the system timer is used Value Range 0 240 s Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day s Lunch s Break s Night s Feature Guide References 2 1 1 5 In...

Page 685: ...ion Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID CO Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property...

Page 686: ...the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP UM Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the PS reference only ...

Page 687: ...ord Two way Transfer Option 1 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS ...

Page 688: ...ed Mailbox No Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user trans...

Page 689: ...r Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Con...

Page 690: ...a call via an incoming call distribution group Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 1 3 3 Call Waiting Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature The number specified in Pickup Dial No on this screen is dialled automatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is ...

Page 691: ... reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2...

Page 692: ...nsion users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 10 2 Executive Busy Override Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which unlike the System Absent Message can be customised for each PS Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX...

Page 693: ...ension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 ...

Page 694: ...ed after going off hook Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off hook Value Range No Line No line is selected Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call Ringing Line The longest ringing call is selected PDN The call arriving at any PDN button is selected F 1 F 12 The cal...

Page 695: ...tion 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Option 5 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Confi...

Page 696: ...nformation is shown on the first line of the PS s display Value Range Caller ID Name CO Line Name DDI DID Name Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 21 4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answeri...

Page 697: ...iguration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension Name Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation or only the One touch Dialling buttons When the mode is set to One touch Dial there is no need to enter 2 before the number when customising a One touch Dialling button Value Range No Limitation One touch Dial Maintenance Cons...

Page 698: ...mming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension Name Character Input Mod...

Page 699: ...ies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS s Incoming Call Log memory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 19 2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS s Outgoing Call Log...

Page 700: ... Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configura...

Page 701: ...ble Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Feature Guide References 2 2 2 7 Log in Log out Option 9 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of ...

Page 702: ... 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 2 9 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Built in Communication Assistant Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant CA application for each extension Value Range Disable Basic Only Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable...

Page 703: ...n Portable Station FWD DND Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Val...

Page 704: ...g of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range...

Page 705: ...g FWD FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD Kee...

Page 706: ... Station Extension Settings PC Programming Manual References 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD 706 PC Programming Manual 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings ...

Page 707: ...de References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected PS extensions Maintenance Console Location 12 2...

Page 708: ...2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate PC Programming Manual References 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0...

Page 709: ...Feature Guide References 4 1 2 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP PC Programming Manual 709 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings ...

Page 710: ...PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting becomes unavailab...

Page 711: ...Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Log in Log out Hurry up Wrap up Time Service TRS Level Change ISDN Service CLIR COLR ISDN Hold Time Service Automatic Manual Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS Voice Mail Transfer NDSS CTI PDN SDN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button PC Programming Manual References 12 2 3 1 PBX Configurati...

Page 712: ...longs to are logged in to or logged out from Value Range None The incoming call distribution group is selected manually All All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to Incoming Group A pre specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 2 2 7 Log in Log out ...

Page 713: ...2 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 5 1 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for SDN Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button The value specified here is only used when System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options is set to Enable Value Range Immediate 1 ...

Page 714: ...tension Number for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked If this cell is left empty the PS will check its own messages only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Extension Number...

Page 715: ... forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Extension Number for Log in Log out Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log in to or log out from Value Range Max 5 dig...

Page 716: ...al Integration 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number for Two way Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the UM VM DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration ...

Page 717: ...ble Button Feature Guide References 2 9 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Dial for One touch Specifies the number to be diall...

Page 718: ...ts consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 4 2 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode Value Range Table 1 Table 8 Maintenance Console L...

Page 719: ...nsfer For example a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss If the cell is left empty the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 3 1 1 Uni...

Page 720: ... select all PSs at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Flexible button data copy PC Programming Manual References 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Bu...

Page 721: ...s transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 12 2 4 PBX Configuration 4 2 4 Extension Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send PC Programming Manual References 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network...

Page 722: ... Portable Station CLIP ID Table Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 5 PBX Configuration 4 2 5 Extension Portable Station CLIP ID Table CLIP 1 8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the PS Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 2 5 PBX Configuration 4 2 5 Extension Portable Stat...

Page 723: ...d Voice Message PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 6 PBX Configuration 4 1 6 Extension Portable Station Simplified Voice Message PC Programming Manual References 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable St...

Page 724: ... of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the extension Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 6 PBX Configuration 4 1 6 Extension Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 2 16 3 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 724 PC Programming Manual 12 2 6 PBX Configuration 4 1 6 Extension Portable Station Simplified Voice Message ...

Page 725: ... used in pair with the DSS Console Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console they must be deleted before this setting can be changed Value Range None Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Type Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button Value Range Not Stored Loop CO Single CO Gro...

Page 726: ... Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Call Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Guide References 2 13 2 Call Park Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the ...

Page 727: ...xtension DSS Console Feature Guide References 5 1 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change Specifies the TRS Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension Value Range 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Guide References 2 7 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 2 7 4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection for ...

Page 728: ...ion 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Extension Number for ICD Group Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Extension Number for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension numbe...

Page 729: ...ution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Guide References 2 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwar...

Page 730: ...ng of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Extension Number for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Gu...

Page 731: ... group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Guide References 2 28 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Extension Number for SDN Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding...

Page 732: ...ng Dial for ISDN Service Specifies the number required to access the telephone company s ISDN service Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Guide References 4 1 2 10 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial for NDSS Specifies the network extension number of the exten...

Page 733: ...alue Range KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX DT321 KX T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type N...

Page 734: ...a conversation into the mailbox of a boss If the cell is left empty the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Feature Guide References 2 28 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview 734 PC Programming Manual 12 3 PBX ...

Page 735: ... Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected To select all DSS Consoles at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 12 3 1 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console DSS key data copy PC Programming Manual Refer...

Page 736: ...736 PC Programming Manual 12 3 1 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console DSS key data copy ...

Page 737: ...onfiguration 5 Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 737 ...

Page 738: ...oorphone number Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Guide References 2 18 1 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Guide References 2 18 1 Doorphone Call Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the destination nu...

Page 739: ...Service COS Specifies the Class of Service COS number COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make trunk calls and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions Internal Call Block Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone PC Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Se...

Page 740: ...ration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Guide References 2 18 1 Doorphone Call 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview VM Trunk Group No Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a VM DPT Group The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Value Ra...

Page 741: ...ating extension number of the external pager Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 13 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Optional Device External Pager Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging 2 17 2 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 2 30 1 Background Music BGM Name Specifies the name of the external pager Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 2 PBX C...

Page 742: ...E line calls without PBX code can be made TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk calls are restricted All All calls are restricted Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Feature Guide References 2 7 5 Walking COS 2 7 6 Verification Code Entry DISA Security Remote Walking COS through DISA without PIN Activation Key Required Enables regi...

Page 743: ...h DISA DISA to Public CO Specifies whether the DISA port is released when a trunk to public trunk call using DISA is established To enable this setting CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Public CO on this screen should be set to Enable Setting this to Disable will free up DISA ports faster but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call and disconnect the trunk quickly Value Range Disable Rel...

Page 744: ...CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Public CO Enables trunk to public trunk calls to be established using DISA Value Range Disable Trunk to public trunk calls are established without using DISA Enable Get DISA Trunk to public trunk calls are established using DISA and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Messag...

Page 745: ... menu by pressing while hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone If disabled retrying the call is possible by pressing Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Option 2 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detection mode Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call for a DISA trunk ...

Page 746: ...the time set here the PBX recognises it as a tone off Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to Option Value Range 10 n n 11 400 ms Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System DISA Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern a ...

Page 747: ...Voice Message DISA System PC Programming Manual References 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 2 24 4 Timed Reminder PC Programming Manual 747 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System ...

Page 748: ...oice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 2 30 2 Outgoing Message OGM 2 16 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA 5 5 8 Floating Extension Name Specifies the name of the OGM Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 2 30 2 Outgoing Message OGM 2 16 1 Direct Inward System Access ...

Page 749: ...ce Voice Message DISA Message PC Programming Manual References 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Feature Guide References 2 16 1 Direct Inward System Access DISA Fax Extension Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 13 3 2 PBX Configuration...

Page 750: ... the card for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 3 3 PBX Configuration 5 3 3 Option Device Voice Message SVM Feature Guide References 2 16 3 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Remote Access Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM feature Using Walking COS a user can access his or her ...

Page 751: ...alue set here the PBX recognises it as a tone on Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to Option Value Range 20 x n n 6 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 13 3 3 PBX Configuration 5 3 3 Option Device Voice Message SVM PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Feature Guide References 2 16 3 Built in Simplifie...

Page 752: ...only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to Option Value Range 3 16 Maintenance Console Location 13 3 3 PBX Configuration 5 3 3 Option Device Voice Message SVM Feature Guide References 2 16 3 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SLT Dial Operation Mode Specifies the SLT dial operation mode to avoid wrong DTMF signal detection from the SLT If Enable is selected you need to ...

Page 753: ... Indicates the number of the external relay reference only Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Guide References 2 18 4 External Relay Control Name Specifies the relay name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Guide References 2 18 4 Exte...

Page 754: ...tenance Console Location 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay PC Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access Feature Guide References 2 1 2 2 Internal Call Block 2 18 4 External Relay Control 754 PC Programming Manual 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External ...

Page 755: ...8 Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Guide References 2 18 3 External Sensor Name Specifies the sensor name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Guide References 2 18 3 External Sensor Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the destination numbe...

Page 756: ...Sensor 5 1 3 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm Email notification Enables e mail notification when the sensor detects an alarm Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Guide References 2 18 3 External Sensor 5 1 3 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm Email Address Specifies the e mail address that will receive a notification when t...

Page 757: ... e mail received when the sensor detects an alarm Value Range Max 256 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Guide References 2 18 3 External Sensor 5 1 3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual 757 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor ...

Page 758: ...758 PC Programming Manual 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor ...

Page 759: ...14 PBX Configuration 6 Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 759 ...

Page 760: ... programmed Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Value Range System the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1 8 additional tables Maintenance Console Location 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial PC Programming Manual References 14 6 PBX Configurat...

Page 761: ... a Caller ID Modification Table is being used the modified number must match the telephone number above CO Line Access Number Telephone Number in order for the call to be routed correctly Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial PC Programming Manual References 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table...

Page 762: ...Control SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Room Status Control Selects whether check in and check out data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge PC Programming Manual References 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 23 2 Room Status...

Page 763: ...his character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing Message Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge PC Programming Manual References 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 22 2 Printing Message Timed Reminder Message for SIP MLT Standard SI...

Page 764: ...e display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 23 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges Value Range ...

Page 765: ...ge Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 23 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 23 3...

Page 766: ...3 3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application Header 1 3 Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill Value Range Max 80 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 23 3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application Footer 1 3 Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the gue...

Page 767: ... Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 23 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Minibar Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2 Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide...

Page 768: ... Limit 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Budget Management Feature Guide References 2 21 4 Display Information 2 22 3 Call Charge Services 2 23 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Options Currency Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR...

Page 769: ...n Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Budget Management Feature Guide References 2 22 3 Call Charge Services Charge Options Action at Charge Limit Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the pre programm...

Page 770: ...one company is detected Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit Feature Guide References 2 22 3 Call Charg...

Page 771: ...ry User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Feature Guide References 2 7 6 Verification Code Entry Verification Code PIN Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a trunk call with the verification code CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls ...

Page 772: ... System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 2 7 6 Verification Code Entry 5 1 1 Class of Service COS Itemised Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a verification code for accounting and billing purposes Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 ...

Page 773: ...ere depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Feature Guide References 2 7 2 Budget Management PC Programming Manual 773 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code ...

Page 774: ...other sets of codes click the applicable tab Second Dial Tone Waiting Code Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 14 4 PBX Configuration 6 4 Feature Second Dial Tone Feature Guide References 2 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Pause Repeating Counter Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial t...

Page 775: ...ference between the displayed message and the UM s pre recorded greeting that corresponds to the absent message To use both features in synchronisation you must record a corresponding greeting for each absent message changed For details about changing UM system prompts see 7 9 Utility UM System Prompts Customisation Absent Message Specifies the message for display Value Range Max 16 characters Mai...

Page 776: ...s 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Feature Guide References 2 13 4 Music on Hold 5 1 3 Tenant Service Operator Extension Number Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be designated as the tenant operator When this parameter is left unspecified the PBX operator serves as the tenant operator Value Range Max 5 digits con...

Page 777: ...eed dialling table is used by the tenant Value Range Same as System Setting PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used Tenant Exclusive Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are used Maintenance Console Location 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant PC Programming Manual References 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2 6 4 Speed Dialli...

Page 778: ...e Console Location 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Feature Guide References 2 6 4 Speed Dialling Personal System 5 1 3 Tenant Service 778 PC Programming Manual 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant ...

Page 779: ...ion 15 PBX Configuration 7 TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 779 ...

Page 780: ...led number are not found in the applicable Denied Code tables the call is made A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 15 ...

Page 781: ... applicable Exception Code tables and if a match is found the call is made A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction call barring for each level Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 a...

Page 782: ...ss Code is found in the dialled number TRS Barring will look only at the following digits A maximum of 100 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed Special Carrier Access Code Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should be unique Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 15 3 PBX Configuration 7 3 TR...

Page 783: ...re disregarded A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed Emergency Number Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls It is not necessary to start the emergency number with a Trunk Access number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 15 4 PBX Configuration 7 4 TRS Emergency Dial Feature Guide References 2 5 4 2 Em...

Page 784: ...ture Guide References 2 7 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring TRS Check for Dial Enables a TRS Barring check for the user dialled and This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges Value Range No Check Check Maintenance Console Location 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 7 1 Toll ...

Page 785: ...ng 2 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation TRS Check after EFA Enables TRS Barring to check the digits dialled after External Feature Access EFA during a trunk call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 7 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 2 11 7 External Feature Access EFA TRS Table Mode for Level N N 2_6 Sele...

Page 786: ...des and exception codes which are only applied to that level Maintenance Console Location 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 7 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 786 PC Programming Manual 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous ...

Page 787: ...ion 16 PBX Configuration 8 ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 787 ...

Page 788: ...nsion user makes a call using Idle Line Access Trunk Access or S CO Line Access method Maintenance Console Location 16 1 PBX Configuration 8 1 ARS System Setting Feature Guide References 2 5 5 3 Trunk Access 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 16 2 PBX Configuration 8...

Page 789: ...luding the leading number 100 leading numbers are displayed at a time To display other sets of leading numbers click the applicable tab Leading Number Specifies the leading number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading Number Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Additional Number of Digits Specif...

Page 790: ...ntenance Console Location 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading Number Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 790 PC Programming Manual 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading Number ...

Page 791: ...le can have its own time blocks Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan including adding or deleting time blocks click Time Setting PC Programming Manual 791 16 3 PBX Configuration 8 3 ARS Routing P...

Page 792: ...ng Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Time A D Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Note Time A must be the earliest block in the day and the following blocks must be set in chronological order Correct programming example Time A 8 00 Time B 17 00 Time C 21 00 Incorrect programming example Time A 8 00 Time B 13 00 Time C 11 30 Time D 17 00 Value Range 0...

Page 793: ...er from the Routing Plan list Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab Time A Time D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone Value Range None 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 16 4 PBX Configuration 8 4 ARS Routing Plan Priority Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS PC Programming Manual 793 16 4 PBX Configuration 8 4 ARS Routin...

Page 794: ...d Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user dialled number Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Modify Command Specifies the commands to modify the user dialled number to access the carrier For details of each command see the Feature Guide Value Range M...

Page 795: ...code can be added to the user dialled number by specifying C in Modify Command on this screen Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Guide References 2 8 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS TRG Priority Selects the order in which trunk groups are seized when making calls via each carrier Trunk Group Priority 1...

Page 796: ...orisation Code for Tenant Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant The Authorisation codes can be added to the user dialled number by specifying A command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab Authorisation Code for Tenant Tenant 1 Tenant 8 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Co...

Page 797: ...A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed 20 leading number exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time To display other sets click the applicable tab Leading Number Exception Specifies the leading number exception Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 16 6 PBX Configuration 8 6 ARS Leading Number Exception Feature G...

Page 798: ...on the screen at a time To display other groups click the applicable tab TRG TRG 01 TRG 64 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 16 7 PBX Configuration 8 7 ARS Authorisation Code for TRG PC Programming Manual References 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Carrier Modify Command Feature G...

Page 799: ...onfiguration 9 Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 799 ...

Page 800: ...splayed at a time To display other priority sets click the applicable tab Using a private network up to 8 PBXs can share one voice mail system centralised VM connected to another PBX This can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network Own PBX Code Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network If this cell is lef...

Page 801: ...sting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Guide References 4 2 1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Guide References 4 2 1 TIE Line Service Enhance...

Page 802: ...ion Key Required Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the voice mail system is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Guide References 4 2 5 QSIG Enhanced Features 802 PC Programming Manual 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Pri...

Page 803: ...will cause network data transmission problems Changing this value in On line mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data Value Range 0 The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs 1 The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs 2 8 The PBX transmits BLF data over the network Maintenance Console Location 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Feature Guide Refer...

Page 804: ...ed Operator Feature Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximum number of hops or transmissions between two PBXs before a packet of BLF data is discarded Value Range 1 63 Maintenance Console Location 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 4 2 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Featu...

Page 805: ... Call Information Activation Key Required Feature Guide References 4 2 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re transmission of network message waiting notifications Value Range 10 240 s Maintenance Console Location 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Tr...

Page 806: ... digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 17 3 PBX Configuration 9 3 Private Network Network Operator VoIP PC Programming Manual References 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 4 2 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS IP GW Card Slot No to notify ...

Page 807: ...er input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table Feature Guide References 4 1 Public Network Features 4 2 1 TIE Line Service 4 2 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Network Extension Name for Programming Reference Specifies the name of ...

Page 808: ... References 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 4 2 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 808 PC Programming Manual 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table ...

Page 809: ...xtension No TIE Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised UM or VM VPS group This floating extension number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 17 5 PBX Configuration 9 5 Private Network Centralised UM VM Unit Group Name 20 characters Specifies the name of the ...

Page 810: ...810 PC Programming Manual 17 5 PBX Configuration 9 5 Private Network Centralised UM VM Unit ...

Page 811: ...figuration 10 CO Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 811 ...

Page 812: ...ttings CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call from the trunk Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 2 21 4 Display Information Trunk Group Number Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs When a V IPGW card is install...

Page 813: ...ach trunk To assign DIL destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Type Indicates the trunk card type reference only Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 1...

Page 814: ...destination in each time mode Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings PC Programming Manual References 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Guide References 2 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 4 2 1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time...

Page 815: ...up number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings CLI for DIL When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set incoming trunk calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations instead of the DIL destinations if the ca...

Page 816: ...ution method for incoming trunk calls The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk Value Range DIL Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI DID Distribution depends on the DDI DID number of the calls Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Guide Refer...

Page 817: ... Table Port Settings Feature Guide References 2 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Guide References 2 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 4 2 1 TIE Line Service 4 2 3 ISD...

Page 818: ...Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Guide References 2 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 4 2 1 TIE Line Service DDI DID TIE Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI DID distribution or for TIE line service Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 18 2 ...

Page 819: ...tinations in each time mode day lunch break night for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration or to programme DDI DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate DDI DID Number Specifies the DDI DID number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Tab...

Page 820: ...rvice Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table PC Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Feature Guide References 2 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI...

Page 821: ...he applicable greeting message to the caller Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table PC Programming Manual References 14 1 PBX Configu...

Page 822: ...ect Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Generate DDI DID Number From Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed DDI DID numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 1 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table A...

Page 823: ... mode click the appropriate Same all check box If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked the destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 1 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Aut...

Page 824: ...ncoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 2 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed Value Range 1 1000 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 2 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Name Generate PC Programming Manual References 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Featu...

Page 825: ...e Name Generate PC Programming Manual References 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 2 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Name Suffix Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI DID name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 18 3 2 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Name Genera...

Page 826: ...CO Incoming Call Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 1 1 5 Intercept Routing 2 3 3 Do Not Disturb DND Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Enables the Intercept Routing No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call Value Range Disable Reorder Tone Sends a reorder tone to the caller However a call through an LCOT card will ri...

Page 827: ...e Location 18 4 PBX Configuration 10 5 CO Incoming Call Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 1 1 6 Intercept Routing No Destination PC Programming Manual 827 18 4 PBX Configuration 10 5 CO Incoming Call Miscellaneous ...

Page 828: ...828 PC Programming Manual 18 4 PBX Configuration 10 5 CO Incoming Call Miscellaneous ...

Page 829: ...X Configuration 11 Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 829 ...

Page 830: ...2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Port Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data Value Range None LAN TELNET Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Page Length Number of Lines Specifies the number of lines on a page of output p...

Page 831: ...age Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Date Format Selects the printed date format Value Range MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD YY DD MM Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Time Format 12H 24H Selects whether times are displayed using the 12 or 24 hour format Value Range 12H 24H Maint...

Page 832: ...R Print Information Incoming Call Specifies whether the information relating to incoming trunk calls such as caller s identification name and number is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digit...

Page 833: ...t Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main PC Programming Manual References 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 23 2 Room Status Control Print Information Timed Reminder Wake up Call Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Conso...

Page 834: ...RS feature Value Range Dial before ARS Modification The user dialled number Dial after ARS Modification The ARS modified number Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 2 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR O...

Page 835: ...led Number Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 6 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Privacy Mode Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled and how many digits to hide when enabled To enable this setting Print Information Outgoing Call on the SMDR tab should be set to...

Page 836: ...ail Recording SMDR Option Condition Code AN Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received before bei...

Page 837: ...BX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR LAN SMDR Port Number Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 2 22 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR LAN SMDR Password Specifies the passwor...

Page 838: ... the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms When the PBX detects a PBX error the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red When this button is pressed the display will show the error number and the button light will turn off automatically Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Featu...

Page 839: ...ntenance Main Feature Guide References 5 6 4 Local Alarm Information Error Log for UM Port Busy Detection of All UM Port Busy Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy specified in Detection of All UM Port Busy This item is recorded by Syslog If this Log is frequently recorded in your customer it indicates insufficiency of UM port Recommend to purchase Activation ...

Page 840: ...tralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Counter in 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main PC Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Pri...

Page 841: ...9 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 5 5 2 PC Programming Remote ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance To enable this setting Remote Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main ...

Page 842: ... remote location for maintenance purposes This number can be specified by Quick Setup Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 5 5 2 PC Programming Password Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer System Password PT Programming Prog Us...

Page 843: ...ation 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 5 5 2 PC Programming Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming Value Range 4 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Guide References 5 1 6 Manager Features PC Program...

Page 844: ...s Feature Guide References 5 5 3 PT Programming PROG Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 19 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 Maintenance PT Programming Access Feature Guide References 5 5 3 PT Programming PROG Selects whether Administrator Level PT users can access each system programming item Value Range Disab...

Page 845: ...w the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronisation group 1 Connect the CS to be registered to the network and if necessary the power supply 2 Click Add A dialogue box will appear Non registered available CSs are displayed on the left 3 Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition 4 Click OK Deleting CSs Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation g...

Page 846: ...hronisation CS Name Indicates the name of the CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service ...

Page 847: ...BX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Primary CS Index Specifies the number of the primary CS Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Primary CS Shelf Indicates the shelf number reference only Value Range 1 Main unit 2 Expansion Unit1 3 Expansion Unit2 4 Expansion Unit3 Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configura...

Page 848: ...f the primary CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Secondary CS Index Specifies the number of the secondary CS Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Secondary CS Shelf Indicates the shelf number reference only Value Range 1 Main uni...

Page 849: ...sation Secondary CS Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation Secondary CS CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation PC Prog...

Page 850: ...850 PC Programming Manual 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Air Synchronisation ...

Page 851: ...nfiguration 1 Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 851 ...

Page 852: ... all settings have been made click OK to create the range of mailboxes Editing Mailboxes To edit a specific mailbox select the desired mailbox then click the icon You can also edit specific parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen Deleting Mailboxes 1 Select a mailbox 2 Click the icon 3 Click OK 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting With Quick Settings you can set ...

Page 853: ...1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting PC Programming Manual References 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 9 Feature Guide References 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview 3 2 2 Subscriber Features 3 2 2 17 Mailbox First Name Specifies the first name of the subscriber If there are non alphabetical characters in the first 4 letters of the first name the mailbox is not included in t...

Page 854: ...rs in the first 4 letters of the first name the mailbox is not included in the directory Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting 854 PC Programming Manual 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting ...

Page 855: ...ogramming Manual References 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 9 Feature Guide References 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview 3 2 2 Subscriber Features 3 2 2 17 Mailbox Extension Specifies the extension number of the mailbox s subscriber Any valid extension number including an Extension Group number can be assigned Note If an Extension Group number is assigned to a mailbox...

Page 856: ...ry Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Directory Listing Feature Guide References 3 2 1 16 Dialling by Name Mailbox Password Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox If a default password is programmed by an adminis...

Page 857: ...ed Messaging E mail Notification KX NSU2xx for the number of users that will be accessing their UM mailbox using a client software programme To change a password for a mailbox 1 On the Mailbox Parameters Screen click Edit under Mailbox Password Message Client for the mailbox extension to change 2 In the window that appears enter the new password and then enter it again to confirm it 3 Click OK Val...

Page 858: ... call The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call Handling options that can be enabled or disabled by the subscriber The caller can also be transferred the Covering Extension by pressing 0 while a Personal Greeting is being played or while leaving a message Note Extension Groups or Logical Extensions extensions whose calls are set to always be directed their mailboxes cannot be assigned a...

Page 859: ...sfer Sequence Selection Specifies the method for the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox Allows each mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence Personal Transfer Sequence Note This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PBX Parameters PBX Environment Alternate Extension Transf...

Page 860: ... 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 2 7 Call Transfer Status No Answer Time Selection Other Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before handling unanswered calls to the extension Note When System is selected the Unified Messaging system uses the time pre p...

Page 861: ... Custom Service Transfer to specified telephone number 1 5 Transfers the caller to one of the specified telephone numbers in numerical order of priority Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 2 7 Call Transfer Status Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handl...

Page 862: ... Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 2 15 Incomplete Call Handling Service Call Transfer Anytime in Incomplete Handling Menu Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call while the Automated Attendant service is playing an Incomplete Call Handling menu Value Range Enable Disable ...

Page 863: ...tion 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 30 Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Only Urgent Messages Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Se...

Page 864: ...er of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer Value Range 0 9 times Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 30 Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Busy Delay Time min Specifies the ti...

Page 865: ...d At HH MM fields 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed and then click OK Value Range Not use The selected device is not used for message notification Continuously The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox If Only Urgent Messages is set to Yes the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox Scheduled The selected device is called on...

Page 866: ...ntenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 28 Message Waiting Notification E mail Device E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 E mail Address Specifies the e mail address of the device Note This setting requires the installation of an Activation Key for Unified Messaging E mail Notification KX NSU2...

Page 867: ...tle Order Specifies the format of the title of the notification Value Range Title ID Name Title Name ID ID Title Name Name Title ID ID Name Title Name ID Title Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 28 Message Waiting Notification E mail Device E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Title Str...

Page 868: ... Guide References 3 2 1 28 Message Waiting Notification E mail Device E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Attach Voice File Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e mail Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 28 Message Waiting ...

Page 869: ...al Custom Service settings External Message Delivery Active If set to Yes subscribers are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3 2 2 12 External Message Delivery Service External Message Delivery Prom...

Page 870: ...n played for a specified length of time to another mailbox Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3 2 1 2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded Note A Mailbox Group number cannot be spe...

Page 871: ...rences 3 2 1 2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent Specifies whether only urgent messages are forwarded Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3 2 1 2 Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Mode Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained i...

Page 872: ... when forwarding of messages will expire Value Range Date and time Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3 2 1 2 Auto Forwarding Personal Custom Service Specifies the Personal Custom Service The System Administrator can assign an operation to each key Note These settings ca...

Page 873: ...g Repeats the greeting None No operation assigned Value Range Transfer to specified mailbox 2 the value set in Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 digits Transfer to specified extension 2 8 digits Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu 1 200 Transfer to outside specified number Outside Number 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery ...

Page 874: ...ces 3 2 2 21 Personal Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in No DTMF Input Operation is performed Value Range 0 10 s Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Guide References 3 2 2 21 Personal Custom Servi...

Page 875: ...mes 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK Value Range Max 40 mailboxes per list Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Personal Distribution List Feature Guide References 3 2 2 14 Group Distribution Lists Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service This tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding Automatic Login and Direct Service settings Remote Ca...

Page 876: ...cified DID number or trunk When logging in from outside telephones the Toll Saver feature is also available Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service Feature Guide References 3 2 2 2 Automatic Login Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required fo...

Page 877: ... ID 2 Value Range Yes No Notice If this is set to No ensure that unauthorised third parties are not allowed access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service Feature Guide References 3 2 2 2 Automatic Login Auto Login D...

Page 878: ...Allows subscribers to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not new messages have been recorded in their mailboxes by the number of rings they hear before the Unified Messaging system answers their calls Toll Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login subscribers can use Toll Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID num...

Page 879: ...s change Change Night Main Menu The subscriber can change the Night Main Menu greeting Only the Message Manager may make this change Change Emergency Greeting The subscriber can change the Emergency Greeting Only the Message Manager may make this change Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service PC Programming M...

Page 880: ... announces to subscribers the number of only new messages marked as urgent in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service All New Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new messages in their mailbox when ...

Page 881: ... Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Announce Number of Messages Message Client Display Language Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the mail IMAP client Value Range English French German Italian Dutch Spanish Portuguese Russian Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Set...

Page 882: ... Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Quick Menu and Greeting Recording PC Programming Manual References 23 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Feature Guide References 3 2 1 17 Emergency Greeting 882 PC Programming Manual 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting ...

Page 883: ...t is strongly recommended that you backup the voice data that has been recorded in mailboxes Backed up voice data can be restored as sound data on a PC by using special software tools For details consult your dealer Value Range Create mailboxes Re create all mailboxes Maintenance Console Location 20 1 3 UM Configuration 1 3 Mailbox Settings Auto Configuration Installation Manual References 5 11 Au...

Page 884: ...884 PC Programming Manual 20 1 3 UM Configuration 1 3 Mailbox Settings Auto Configuration ...

Page 885: ...nfiguration 2 Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 885 ...

Page 886: ...e Guide References 3 2 1 11 Class of Service COS Prompt Mode Specifies the language used for system prompts played for the subscriber during Subscriber Service If set to Primary the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used Value Range Primary Guidance No 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General PC Programming Manual Refer...

Page 887: ...ing Value Range Normal A navigation voice menu is given for each step Simplified Only direct prompts are given for making each setting For Personal Greetings only a No Answer Greeting can be set None No tutorial is played and settings for the mailbox must be made manually Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Feature Guide References 3 2 2 27 Subscriber Tuto...

Page 888: ...2 Class of Service General Feature Guide References 3 2 1 28 Message Waiting Notification E mail Device Desktop Messaging Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can access the contents of their mailboxes with an e mail application using IMAP This includes the Microsoft Outlook e mail client plug in Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service G...

Page 889: ...ferences 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Remote Call Forward to CO Select if subscribers in the Class of Service have allowed to do Remote Call Forward to CO Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Feature Guide References 3 1 1 Unified Messaging System Overview Mailbox Personal Greeting Length s Defines the maximum length in seconds...

Page 890: ...tenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Message Length Limited min Specifies the maximum recording time for messages left to subscribers in the Class of Service Only specified if Message Length Selection is set to Limited Value Range 1 60 min Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time Selecti...

Page 891: ...e Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox New Message Retention Time Limited days Defines the number of days that new messages will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the Class of Service The storage period begins the day after the message reception Only specified if New Message Retention Time Selection is set to Limited Value Range 1 30 days Maintenance Console Location 21 1...

Page 892: ...1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement Selection Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can assign telephone numbers for the Personal Caller Name Announcement feature Note This setting is not available for COS 65 Message Manager and COS 66 System Manager Value Range None Other Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of...

Page 893: ...ne the warning will not be announced Value Range None Other Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Mailbox Capacity Warning Other min Specifies when the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording time for mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time The setting indicates the remaining recording time...

Page 894: ...he system requests confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before erasing a message in the mailbox If set to No the message is erased immediately Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Personal Greeting for Caller ID If set to Yes subscribers in the Class of Service can record personal greetings that are played for specific ca...

Page 895: ...onfiguration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Guide References 3 2 2 1 Auto Receipt Autoplay New Message If set to Yes the system plays new messages automatically when subscribers in the Class of Service log into their mailboxes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Play New Messages Sequentially If set to Yes the system plays all new me...

Page 896: ...fies whether or not the system announces the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the Class of Service plays a message left by a caller if their name has not been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature If the name has been recorded it will be announced regardless of this setting Note If Caller ID Callback is set to Yes Caller ID numbers will be announced regardless of this setting see ...

Page 897: ...f Service will expire after a set time Value Range Disable Other Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Guide References 3 1 2 4 Password Administration Password Expiry Period Other Specifies the number of days a set mailbox password will be used before it expires and the system prompts the subscriber for a new password This feature is only available ...

Page 898: ... Service Note This setting is not available for COS 65 Message Manager Value Range 1 32 ALL Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Call Transfer PC Programming Manual References 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Intercom Paging Parameters Use Call Waiting on Busy If set to Yes the system signals subscribers in the Class of Service when they are o...

Page 899: ... hear You have a call when they answer transferred calls Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Call Transfer Call Transfer to Outside If set to Yes the system allows calls to be transferred to a trunk via the following features Custom Service Caller ID Callback Call Transfer Service Personal Custom Service Call through Service Note This setting is...

Page 900: ...f subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their password when accessing their mailbox Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Hospitality Mode PC Programming Manual References 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Password Feature Guide References 3 2 1 21 Hospitality Mode Personal...

Page 901: ...uide References 3 2 1 21 Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out Password Specifies if the password of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber s extension is set to the Check Out status Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Hospitality Mode Feature Guide References 2 23 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY 3 2 1 21 Hospitality...

Page 902: ... Owner Name Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when the subscriber s extension is set to the Check Out status Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Hospitality Mode Feature Guide References 2 23 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY 3 2 1 21 Hospitality Mode 902 PC Programming Manual 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Cl...

Page 903: ...ation 3 UM Extension Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 903 ...

Page 904: ... Greeting is Good morning Good afternoon Good evening Welcome to the Unified Messaging System Each call service can have its own setting Value Range None System Other Maintenance Console Location 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group Feature Guide References 3 2 1 12 Company Greeting Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Company Greeting No Other Specifies the number of the g...

Page 905: ...is or her choice provided the System Administrator or the Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu To specify a Prompt Selection Number see 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Prompt Setting Note If Selective is specified you will need to select a prompt available for callers that cannot input DTMF signals such as rotary phone callers See Prompt for No DTMF I...

Page 906: ...ry Language Feature Guide References 3 2 1 41 System Prompts Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Delayed Answer Time Specifies whether the Unified Messaging system answers calls on the port or trunk immediately 0 or after a delay 1 s 60 s Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group 906 PC Programming Manual 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1...

Page 907: ...ed in 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group to each UM port 1 For each UM port number select a Service Group number 1 64 from the Service Group drop down list 2 Click OK when finished PC Programming Manual 907 22 2 UM Configuration 3 2 UM Extension Trunk Service Port Assignment ...

Page 908: ...908 PC Programming Manual 22 2 UM Configuration 3 2 UM Extension Trunk Service Port Assignment ...

Page 909: ...nfiguration 4 Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 909 ...

Page 910: ... Automatic Login or Holiday Service is used these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing settings Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service Received Caller ID PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first registered number to last When programming Caller ID PIN routing note the order of registration and...

Page 911: ... Call Transfer for Day Night Lunch and Break service Specifies the destination to which the call from an assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded A destination can be set for each time mode To disable the setting select None A Mailbox Group number can be entered here instead of a mailbox number Value Range None disables this feature Custom Service Menu forwards callers to the specified...

Page 912: ...ngs Caller ID PIN Call Routing Feature Guide References 3 2 1 35 PIN Call Routing Call Transfer for Day Night Lunch and Break service Specifies the destination to which the call using an assigned PIN number is automatically forwarded A destination can be set for each time mode To disable the setting select None A Mailbox Group number can be entered here instead of a mailbox number Value Range None...

Page 913: ...Attendant top menu if the caller does not make a selection Value Range 1 5 times Maintenance Console Location 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 3 Automated Attendant AA Play Owner s Name during Transfer Determines whether Transferring you to name is announced to the caller befor...

Page 914: ...Feature Guide References 3 2 1 34 Operator Service Operator Service Operator s Extension Specifies the extension number for Operator 1 2 and 3 for the checked time setting Note The default extension number of Operator 1 in day mode cannot be used with the Message Waiting Notification Lamp feature Since the extension number assigned as Operator Service No 1 for Day is automatically designated as th...

Page 915: ... the Call Waiting feature of PBX Disconnect Message Disconnects the caller after playing Thank you for calling Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 34 Operator Service Operator Service No Answer Coverage Mode Specifies how to handle operator calls when they are not answered within the time period set in Operator Service O...

Page 916: ...guration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 34 Operator Service Call Hold Mode If Call Hold Mode is checked the system gives callers the option of either holding for a specific extension or selecting one of several Incomplete Call Handling Service options While on hold the system periodically gives callers the choice to either continue to hold or select one of the Incom...

Page 917: ...e Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 3 Automated Attendant AA Alternate Extension Specifies extensions that require a different transfer sequence than normal Calls to these extensions will be transferred according with the setting for 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PBX Environment Al...

Page 918: ...te Extension Transfer Sequence Up to 16 digits 0 9 D R F T X Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 3 Automated Attendant AA List All Names If set to Enable callers can listen to all subscriber names and extension numbers in the Automated Attendant service or Custom Service Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 919: ...uration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 32 No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day Night Lunch and Break Parameter Specifies the transfer destination if Mailbox or Extension is selected for No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day Night Lunch and Break Selection Value Range 2 8 digits for extensions 2 the value set in Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 digits f...

Page 920: ...3 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 16 Dialling by Name Key Mode Specifies the standard used for keypad text entry If set to use the North American Standard press 7 for Q and 9 for Z If set to use the Australasian Standard press 1 for Q and Z Value Range North American Standard Australasian Standard Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration ...

Page 921: ...sages Value Range 5 60 s Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Delayed Answer Time for No New Message 5 60 s Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are no new messages Value Range 5 60 s Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 2 29 Toll Saver PC Prog...

Page 922: ...istrator to create Custom Services visually Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited arranged using a familiar drag and drop interface The following Custom Service types are available Menu Transfer Date Control Time Control Day Control Password Creating a Custom Service 1 Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type 2 Click on an area within the workspace to the right...

Page 923: ...able when setting Menu Transfer or Password You can also skip this step and go to step 7 5 Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file When Record from extension is selected 1 Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording then click Connect 2 When the specified extension rings go off hook 3 Click Record Play or Stop to record or play a voice label through the exten...

Page 924: ...ences 3 2 1 15 Custom Service Prompt Mode Specifies the language for prompts used by this Custom Service Note This parameter overrides a set Incoming Call Service Prompt If Primary is selected the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used If None is selected the prompt mode of previous process will be continued or Primary language will be selected Value Range Non...

Page 925: ...ll is actually handled Value Range Extn enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialling the extension number Mbx enables callers to leave messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number PIN enables callers to be transferred directly to the specified party according to the setting for PIN Call Routing Service by dialling a PIN No disables extension transfer and m...

Page 926: ...allers do not dial any numbers after listening to the menu message most likely because they are using rotary telephones The default setting is Operator which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after the menu message plays back Press the desired number or stay on the line to be connected to an operator Value Range Trf to Mbx Allows the caller to leave messages in a speci...

Page 927: ...ion is enabled it is strongly recommended that each subscriber set a password for his or her mailbox this will prevent unauthorised callers from accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers mailboxes Dial by Name Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a first or last name of the person the caller wishes to reach then transfers the caller to the corresponding extension Repe...

Page 928: ... characters From To Select the check box and then click the input field to select a date month and day from the calendar You can specify a beginning date From ending date To or both for each period Assigned Operation Trf to Mbx Trf to Ext Operator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu CS VM Serv Call Trf Serv Subscriber Serv Dial by Name Repeat Menu Main Menu Trf to Fax Extn List All Names None see 23 3 1 UM ...

Page 929: ...Feature Guide References 3 2 1 15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual 929 23 3 2 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Date Control ...

Page 930: ...operation that is enabled for all other times not included in the set time periods Value Range Period 1 5 Name Max 16 characters From To Select the check box click the input field and then specify a time hour and minute You can specify a beginning time From ending time To or both for each period Assigned Operation Trf to Mbx Trf to Ext Operator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu CS VM Serv Call Trf Serv Su...

Page 931: ...tion 23 3 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Time Control Feature Guide References 3 2 1 15 Custom Service PC Programming Manual 931 23 3 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Time Control ...

Page 932: ...fy the number of this Date Control Holiday Custom Service or the number of its higher layered Custom Service see 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table b Assign the desired Date Control Holiday Custom Service or its higher layered Custom Service to the desired Port Trunk see 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group For Port Affected Trunk Affected exclud...

Page 933: ...3 Service Settings Custom Service Password Feature Guide References 3 2 1 15 Custom Service Menu Repeat Cycle 1 3 Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated to the caller Value Range 1 3 times Maintenance Console Location 23 3 5 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Password Feature Guide References 3 2 1 15 Custom Service Wait for First Digit 0 1...

Page 934: ...rator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu CS see 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Menu Transfer No DTMF Input Operation Maintenance Console Location 23 3 5 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Password Feature Guide References 3 2 1 15 Custom Service Entry Failure Determines what operation is activated when a caller enters an invalid password X times X the value se...

Page 935: ...ames None see 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Menu Transfer Key Assigned Operation 0 9 Cancel Assigned Operation Trf to Mbx Trf to Ext Operator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu CS VM Serv Call Trf Serv Subscriber Serv Dial by Name Repeat Menu Main Menu Trf to Fax Extn List All Names None see 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Menu Transfer Key Assigned...

Page 936: ...e Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table PC Programming Manual References 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table Holiday Table Setting Feature Guide References 3 2 1 20 Holiday Service Name of Holiday Specifies the name of the holiday setting for later reference Value Range Max 32 Characters Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM...

Page 937: ...le Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3 2 1 20 Holiday Service End Date Month Day Specifies the month and day of the holiday end date Click the cell to display a calendar Select a month using the arrow buttons and click on a day for the selected month This setting synchronises with the PBX s Holiday Table Value Range Month and Day Maintenance...

Page 938: ...o Disable or re programme the settings for the holiday Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3 2 1 20 Holiday Service Company Greeting No Specify the greeting callers hear when calling the affected trunks or ports during the holiday Value Range None do not playback No greeting is heard No 1 32 The selected ...

Page 939: ... Service Interview Mailbox Custom Service Menu If Interview Mailbox or Custom Service Menu was selected for Service specify the Interview Mailbox or Custom Service here Value Range Interview Mailbox number Custom Service number Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3 2 1 20 Holiday Service Trunk Affected Specify which trunks ...

Page 940: ...o the holiday setting or select the All check box to apply the holiday to all UM ports Click OK to finish Value Range Port No 1 24 All Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Guide References 3 2 1 20 Holiday Service 940 PC Programming Manual 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table ...

Page 941: ...figuration 5 System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 941 ...

Page 942: ...ick the Edit button of the group to add mailboxes to 2 In the Subscribers To Add column select the check boxes for the mailbox numbers to add to the group 3 Click Add 4 Click OK 5 Click OK Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialogue box 1 Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon Note Before you can record confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and tha...

Page 943: ...r Value Range 2 the value set in Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 1 UM Configuration 5 1 System Parameters Mailbox Group Feature Guide References 3 2 2 14 Group Distribution Lists Group Name Specifies the group name Value Range Max 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 1 UM Configuration 5 1 System Parameters Mailbox Group Feature Guide References 3 2 2 14 G...

Page 944: ...click the icon You can also edit specific parameters directly from the Extension Group list Deleting Extension Groups 1 Select an Extension Group 2 Click the icon 3 Click Yes Editing Extension Group Members 1 In the Extension No column click the Click To Edit button to open the Group Members window 2 Click the icon 3 Enter the extension to add in Extension and click OK 4 Click OK The table on this...

Page 945: ...s the group name Value Range Max 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 2 UM Configuration 5 2 System Parameters Extension Group Feature Guide References 3 2 1 18 Extension Group PC Programming Manual 945 24 2 UM Configuration 5 2 System Parameters Extension Group ...

Page 946: ...r Extension and Description 1 Specify the Caller ID No and Description for each entry that will be used 2 Click OK Editing Caller ID Entries To edit an entry select the desired mailbox group then click the icon You can also edit specific parameters directly from the list Deleting Mailboxes 1 Select an entry 2 Click the icon 3 Click Yes Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information d...

Page 947: ...em Parameters System Caller Name Announcement Feature Guide References 3 2 1 10 Caller Name Announcement Description Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID number Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 3 UM Configuration 5 3 System Parameters System Caller Name Announcement Feature Guide References 3 2 1 10 Caller Name Announcement PC Programming Manual 947 24 3 U...

Page 948: ...rs Morning Hours Start Time HH MM Specifies the starting time of the morning greeting Value Range HH MM HH Hour MM Minute Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 12 Company Greeting Afternoon Hours Start Time HH MM Specifies the starting time of the afternoon greeting Value Range HH MM HH Hour MM Minute Maintenance Console ...

Page 949: ...tion 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 31 Multilingual Service 3 2 1 41 System Prompts Language 1 5 Language 1 5 Assigns a selection number 1 9 to each language Callers use the numbers to select the desired languages for their message prompts This setting is required when either one or both of the following parameters are set to Selective a Day Night Lunch and Break M...

Page 950: ...Guide References 3 2 1 31 Multilingual Service 3 2 1 41 System Prompts Language 1 5 DTMF Specifies the number to be input to select the language set for the current language selection number Value Range None 1 9 Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 31 Multilingual Service 3 2 1 41 System Prompts Selection Menu Wait Time ...

Page 951: ... s Specifies the length of time in seconds that the system waits after the line is connected for incoming calls before playing the prompt Value Range 0 10 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 41 System Prompts Delay Time After Connected Received for Outgoing 0 10 s Specifies the length of time in seconds that the syste...

Page 952: ... system announces AM PM before the time such as P M 3 42 After the system announces AM PM after the time such as 3 42 P M 24 h the system announces the time in 24 h format such as 15 42 Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters System Guidance Select Language O clock Prompt Specifies when and if O clock is announced Value Range When at 00 the system announ...

Page 953: ... T X Specifies the sequence for transferring calls to an operator s extension Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and special codes D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection T Dial Tone Detection Dial Pause default 1 s Dial Pause default 3 s X Extension Dialling 0 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PBX Environment ...

Page 954: ...4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 1 Alternate Extension Group Dialling Parameters MSW Notification Dialling Parameters Call Transfer No Answer Time 10 60 s Specifies the length of time that the system waits before retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer at the destination extension Note Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No Answer Time is longe...

Page 955: ...f 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Dialling Parameters Pause Time for 100 9900 ms 100 ms Specifies the pause time for used in call sequences Value Range 100 9900 ms in units of 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Message Waiting Notification System Callback No Up to 32 digits Specifies ...

Page 956: ...es 3 2 2 12 External Message Delivery Service Busy Delay min Specifies the length of time in minutes the system waits to try to deliver an external message again when the destination is busy Value Range 1 60 min Malaysia 2 120 min Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 2 12 External Message Delivery Service No Answer Delay m...

Page 957: ...ssage Length 1 6 min Specifies the maximum length in minutes of messages recorded for the External Delivery Message Value Range 1 6 min Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 2 12 External Message Delivery Service Max Messages for Mailboxes 1 100 msgs Specifies the maximum number of External Delivery Messages that can be sto...

Page 958: ...e or to speak to the message sender Value Range Max 32 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Intercom Paging Parameters Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX It allows the system to page the called party announce the caller s name line number etc while the caller is placed on hold ...

Page 959: ... answer Value Range 1 10 times Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Feature Guide References 3 2 1 23 Intercom Paging Caller Record...

Page 960: ... Parameters Main Fax Extension No 1 8 digits Specifies the extension number of the main fax machine Value Range 1 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Alternate Fax Extension No 1 8 digits Specifies the extension number of the alternate fax machine When the main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the time specified under Fax No A...

Page 961: ...Manager when fax calls were not answered Mbx The system will announce the number of unanswered fax calls to the Fax Manager when the Fax Manager logs in to his or her mailbox Ext The system will announce the number of unanswered fax calls to the Fax Manager by calling the Fax Manager s extension Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Fax Notification Mo...

Page 962: ... 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Maximum Cyclic Tone Time 0 60 s Specifies the length of time the system waits when a cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Maximum Call Duration 0 60 min Specifies the maximum duration of calls If the system detects no DTMF signals for the specif...

Page 963: ...Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 7 Call Transfer to Outside Outside Transfer Sequence EFA Transfer Sequence Up to 16 digits 0 9 D F R T N A Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer calls to trunks using EFA External Feature Access This setting should match the settings of the PBX Value Range Max 1...

Page 964: ...nal Feature Access does not answer This setting should match the settings of the PBX Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and special codes D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection T Dial Tone Detection Dial Pause for 1 s default Dial Pause for 3 s default N Telephone Number Dialling A Feature Access Code 0 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 S...

Page 965: ...meters Trunk Group 1 64 EFA Transfer Specifies whether or not the system uses EFA External Feature Access when transferring incoming trunk calls to another trunk If set to Enable the system transfers incoming trunk calls to another trunk according to EFA Transfer Sequence specified in Transfer to Outside If set to Disable the system transfers incoming trunks calls to another trunk according to Out...

Page 966: ...Number 1 20 Specifies the number of digits for local area telephone numbers According to this parameter telephone numbers dialled by the system can be distinguished as either local calls or long distance calls Value Range 1 20 Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters E mail Option E mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to...

Page 967: ... their length Value Range Unlimited Other Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Guide References 3 2 1 28 Message Waiting Notification E mail Device Maximum Message Length Other 1 30 min Specifies the maximum length of voice messages sent as e mail attachments Note If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting surplus parts of ...

Page 968: ...gth 3 8 Specifies the maximum allowed number of digits for a mailbox number Note This setting cannot be changed to a smaller value if mailboxes exist with a number of digits greater than that smaller value Those mailboxes must be re numbered or deleted before this setting can be changed to a smaller value Value Range 3 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Paramete...

Page 969: ...M Configuration 6 H W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 969 ...

Page 970: ...all If no answer is detected the system disconnects the call Value Range 0 250 s Maintenance Console Location 25 1 UM Configuration 6 H W Settings Global Parameters DTMF Cut Length 0 500 ms Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be deleted when it is detected while recording Value Range 0 500 ms Maintenance Console Location 25 1 UM Configuration 6 H W Settings Global Parameters Minimum Message L...

Page 971: ...onfiguration 7 System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 971 ...

Page 972: ...m Security Manager Password for System Manager Up to 16 numeric digits If Enable is selected in System Manager Access from Telephone assign a numerical password here for the System Manager to login to the system Value Range Max 16 digits Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Manager Feature Guide References 3 1 2 7 System Security Password for System Manager Message ...

Page 973: ...n Message Manager Access from Telephone assign a numerical password here for the Message Manager to login to the system Value Range Max 16 digits Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Manager Feature Guide References 3 1 2 7 System Security Password for Message Manager Message Client Specifies the password for the Message Manager for accessing the Unified Messaging s...

Page 974: ... value specified under Login Failures before Disconnection 1 99 times Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Subscriber Login Failures before Disconnection 1 99 times Specifies the number of times an invalid password can be entered before the system disconnects the call In order to use this feature Enable Login Failure Disconnection must be ...

Page 975: ...igits Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Subscriber Default Password Prefix 1 or 2 digits Mailbox No Select this option to specify default mailbox passwords using a prefix pattern The value entered here will be combined with the mailbox number to become the default password For example if 55 is entered here and then mailbox 101 is created its default password will...

Page 976: ...976 PC Programming Manual 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security ...

Page 977: ...Section 27 Network Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console PC Programming Manual 977 ...

Page 978: ...information manually Value Range Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings Feature Guide References 5 6 6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment LAN Setting IP Address Specifies the IP address of the mother board This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the fo...

Page 979: ...enance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings DNS Setting Port Number Specifies the port number of the DNS server This parameter is only available for entering values when Obtain DNS server address automatically is selected Value Range 53 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings DNS Setting Obtain DNS server add...

Page 980: ...intenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings DSP IP Setting Obtain DSP IP address automatically Use the following DSP IP address Specifies whether the DHCP server assigns IP address information automatically to the DSP card s or to enter the information manually Value Range Obtain DSP IP address automatically Use the following DSP IP address Maintenance Console...

Page 981: ...x 10M Full 10 Mbps full duplex 10M Half 10 Mbps half duplex Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Advanced Settings LAN Port MDI MDIX Specifies the cable type connected to the LAN port Value Range Auto MDI MDIX Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Advanced Settings Port Mirroring Packet kind for mirroring Specifies the types of packets...

Page 982: ... Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask address of the mother board reference only Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference Assigned IP Address Default Gateway Indicates the assigned IP address of the default gateway for the network reference only Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference DSP Card 1 DSP Card 2 IP Address In...

Page 983: ... DSP card reference only Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference DSP Card 1 DSP Card 2 Default Gateway Indicates the Default Gateway address of the DSP card reference only Maintenance Console Location 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference PC Programming Manual 983 27 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports ...

Page 984: ...ber used for the DHCP server Value Range 67 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP IP address auto assignment Starting IP address Specifies the starting IP address for the assignable range of IP addresses Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Ending IP address Specifies the end...

Page 985: ... Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP IP Address Static Assignment MAC Address Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC address IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC addre...

Page 986: ...s Specifies IP addresses currently assigned by the system Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Remaining lease time Specifies the remaining lease time for the MAC address IP address pair Value Range 1 85777 s Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP 986 PC Programming Manual 27 2 1 Network...

Page 987: ...nsole Location 27 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Server Feature FTP Data Transfer Port Port number Minimum Specifies the minimum port number for FTP data transfer Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Server Feature FTP Data Transfer Port Port number Maximum Specifies the maximum port number for FTP data transfer Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location...

Page 988: ...rver Feature FTP User Information Password Specifies the password for the PBX s FTP server authentication Note Be sure to change the password from its initial default value Also for security reasons change the password regularly Value Range Max 24 characters A Z a z 0 9 hyphen underscore Note The first character must be a letter or number Maintenance Console Location 27 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Ser...

Page 989: ...e Enable Maintenance Console Location 27 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP HTTPs LAN Port number Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming when using an SSL connection Value Range 443 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP Automatic logout Timer min Specif...

Page 990: ... Daylight Saving If this feature is disabled connected KX UT series SIP phones will use their individually programmed time settings Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 27 2 4 Network Service 2 5 Server Feature NTP PC Programming Manual References 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving SNTP SNTP Server IP Address 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 Syste...

Page 991: ...tenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP SMTP server for relay SMTP server address Specifies the IP address or host name of the SMTP server to be used to send e mails Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 IP address Max 128 characters host name Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP SMTP server for relay SMTP server Port number Spec...

Page 992: ...TP Authentication User Name Specifies the user name required to access the SMTP server Value Range Max 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP SMTP Authentication Password Specifies the password required to access the SMTP server Value Range Max 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP POP Before SMT...

Page 993: ...ge 110 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP POP Before SMTP User Name Specifies the user name for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled Value Range Max 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP POP Before SMTP Password Specifies the password for the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled ...

Page 994: ...r Feature SMTP Mail Receiving Receive Port number SMTPs Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTPs Value Range 25 465 587 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP Mail Receiving Receive Port number SMTP Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTP Value Range 25 465 587 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 5 Network Service 2 6...

Page 995: ... 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 IMAP4 over SSL IMAP4 over SSL Specifies whether to enable SSL encryption for the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 IMAP4 over SSL Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server when using SSL encryption The default value is 993 Value Range 993 1024 65535 Mainte...

Page 996: ...Connection Timeout min Specifies the amount of time of no activity that is required before an authenticated connection to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected Value Range 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 60 min Maintenance Console Location 27 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 996 PC Programming Manual 27 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 ...

Page 997: ...ss of the FTP site Click the IP Address radio button when this is used Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP Name Specifies the name of the FTP site Click the Name radio button when this is used Value Range FTP site name max 253 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP Server Port ...

Page 998: ...the password for the user name required to log in to the FTP site Value Range Max 24 characters A Z a z 0 9 hyphen underscore Note The first character must be a letter number or Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP Protocol Specifies the communication protocol for the FTP connection Value Range FTP FTPS Explicit FTPS Implicit Maintenance Console Location 27 3 ...

Page 999: ...e Syslog server IP address Host name Specifies the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 IP address Max 253 characters host name Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Network Service 3 2 Client Feature Syslog Port Specifies the connection port for the remote Syslog server Value Range 514 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Network Servic...

Page 1000: ... Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor SNMP version Specifies the version of the SNMP protocol to use Value Range SNMP V1 SNMP V2c Maintenance Console Location 27 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor SNMP manager port Specifies...

Page 1001: ...e References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor MIB info SysLocation Specifies the physical location for the system Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor SNMP Manager 1 SNMP Manager 2 It is possible to assign up t...

Page 1002: ...racters host name Maintenance Console Location 27 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor Trap port Specifies a port number used to send trap messages from the agent to an SNMP manager Value Range 162 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Gu...

Page 1003: ...priseSpecific Major Selects whether the PBX sends Major Alarm trap messages to an SNMP manager or not Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 27 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor TRAP filtering enterpriseSpecific Minor Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm trap messages to an S...

Page 1004: ... 4 1 Network Service 4 1 Other Security ICMP Echo Reply Log Output Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo replies Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 4 1 Network Service 4 1 Other Security SSL TLS Encryption Suite Specifies the method of encryption used for SSL TLS Value Range AES256 SHA DES CBC3 SHA AES128 SHA DES CBC SHA Maintenance Console Location 27 4 1 Network Service 4 1...

Page 1005: ...ice 4 2 Other NAS NAS Setting Protocol Specifies the communication protocol for the NAS connection Value Range NFS CIFS Maintenance Console Location 27 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS NAS Setting NAS Address IP Address Specifies the IP address of the NAS Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS NAS Setting NAS Address Name Specifies th...

Page 1006: ...Other NAS CIFS Setting User Name Specifies the NAS connection user name when NAS Setting Protocol is set to CIFS Value Range Max 24 characters multi byte characters allowed Maintenance Console Location 27 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS CIFS Setting Password Specifies the NAS connection password when NAS Setting Protocol is set to CIFS Value Range Max 24 characters multi byte characters allowed ...

Page 1007: ...Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual 1007 ...

Page 1008: ...in Features Account Code Entry 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Account Code Mode Feature Guide References 2 5 4 3 Account Code Entry Advice of Charge AOC 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 4 1 2 3 ...

Page 1009: ...IP ID Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 ARS Itemised Code 12 2 5 PBX Configuration 4 2 5 Extension Portable Station CLIP ID Table 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Itemised Billing Code for ARS Section 16 PBX Configuration 8 ARS 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main SMDR Options Option ARS Dial Feature Guide Refere...

Page 1010: ...Voice Message Access 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Tone Detection DISA Tone Detection Silence DISA Tone Detection Continuous DISA Tone Detection Cyclic 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Display Lock SVM Lock 12 1 8 PBX Configuration 4 1 8 Extension Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 12 2 6 PBX Configuration 4 ...

Page 1011: ...arge Options Currency Charge Options Currency Display Position Charge Options Action at Charge Limit Charge Options Meter Start on Answer Detection Feature Guide References 2 22 3 Call Charge Services Call Distribution Port Group 9 11 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW Shelf Property Hunt Pattern Hunt Pattern 1 16 Leading Number 9 11 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW...

Page 1012: ...uration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 2 3 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call Hold 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Hold Recall s Recall Disconnect after Recall x60s 10 6 1 PBX ...

Page 1013: ...e 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park Feature Guide References 2 13 2 Call Park Call Pickup ...

Page 1014: ... 2 6 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Call Transfer CT by QSIG 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 4 2 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG Call Waiting 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Caller ID Caller ID Signalling 10 6 ...

Page 1015: ...aller ID Visual Caller ID Display s 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 Private Network Public Call through Private Network Minimum Public Caller ID Digits 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Main Caller ID Modification Table 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modifica...

Page 1016: ...warded to CO 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main CLIP on ICD Group Button 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number CLIP CLIP ID CLIP CLIP on Extension CO CLIP CLIR CLIP COLR 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extens...

Page 1017: ...tralised VM Network MSW Transmission Buffer Feature Guide References 4 2 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Class of Service COS 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 5 1 1 Class of ...

Page 1018: ...Unattended Conference Disconnect Timer s 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Transfer to CO 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 2 CO CO Call Limitation After Conference 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conference Confirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Echo Cancel Conference 1...

Page 1019: ...mation Tone Tone 5 Hold Feature Guide References 2 25 2 Confirmation Tone Data Line Security 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Data Line Security Set Cancel 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Data Mode Feature Guide References 2 11 5 Data Line Security Dial Tone 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Optio...

Page 1020: ...ure Guide References 2 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Direct Inward System Access DISA 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Delayed Answer Timer s DISA Mute OGM Start Timer after answering s DISA No Dial Intercept Timer s DISA 2nd Dial Timer for AA s DISA Intercept Timer Day s Lunch s Break s Night s DISA Disconnect Timer after I...

Page 1021: ...ge Charge Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point Charge Options Currency Charge Options Currency Display Position 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings CO Name Feature Guide References 2 21 4 Display Information Do Not Disturb DND 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Busy Tone DND Tone s 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System...

Page 1022: ...evel Day Lunch Break Night 10 8 2 PBX Configuration 2 8 2 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from DOORPHONE 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Guide References 2 18 1 Doorphone Call Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment 27 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHC...

Page 1023: ... PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 1 PT Operation One touch Busy Override by SCO key 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Executive Override Deny 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 2 10 2 Executive Busy Override Extension Dial Lock 10 ...

Page 1024: ... CO Conversation 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 7 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous TRS Check after EFA Feature Guide References 2 11 7 External ...

Page 1025: ...e button data copy 12 1 5 PBX Configuration 4 1 5 Extension Wired Extension PF Button 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2 21 2 Flexible Buttons Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Extension Features Other PBX Extension 10 6 2 PBX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering Plan Quick ...

Page 1026: ...ble Station Extension Settings FWD DND 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Extension Number for Group Fwd Both Extension Number for Group Fwd External Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Feature Guide References 2 3 4 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Group Section 11 PBX Configuration 3 Group Feature Guide References 5 1 2 Group Group Call Distribution...

Page 1027: ...ences 2 4 4 Hands free Answerback Hands free Operation 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free s 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Answer Mode Feature Guide References 2 11 1 Hands free Operation Headset Operation 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension...

Page 1028: ...ng Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features Incoming Call Log 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 7 Incoming Call Log Busy Intercept when Called Party is Busy Incoming Call Log Fwd All Fwd Busy Incoming Call Log Call Pickup Incoming Call Log Extension TIE Call Outgoing Call Log Extension Call 11 5 1 PBX Confi...

Page 1029: ... Night s 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow No Answer Time out Manual Queue Redirection Destination Day Lunch Break Night 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destinati...

Page 1030: ...evice Doorphone Destination Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 2 1 2 Internal Call Features IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT 9 2 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Site Main IP Terminal Registration Mode 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Card Property 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5...

Page 1031: ... Memory 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 7 Outgoing Call Log Extension Call 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 7 Outgoing Call Log Memory 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 7 Outgoing Call Log Memory Feature Guide References 2 6 3 Last Number Redial LED Indication 10 9 PBX Config...

Page 1032: ... Hour Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Minute Feature Guide References 5 6 4 Local Alarm Information Log in Log out 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Log in Log out Not Ready Manual Wrap up Mode On Off 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous No of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log out Last Extension Log o...

Page 1033: ...ager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Feature Guide References 5 1 6 Manager Features Message Waiting 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Message Waiting Set 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 Syste...

Page 1034: ...roup 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO Send CLIP of Extension Caller when call is forwarded to CO Feature Guide References 4 2 6 Network ICD Group Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override ...

Page 1035: ...ansfer PBX to PC 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message s 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features OGM Record Clear Playback 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Dela...

Page 1036: ... Group 11 4 1 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group All Setting 11 4 2 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group External Pager 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Paging Deny Feature Guide References 2 17 1 Paging Pause Insertion 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Pause Time 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Time...

Page 1037: ...ration 3 10 Group P2P Group Feature Guide References 5 2 3 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Ping 7 1 2 Utility Diagnosis Ping Feature Guide References 5 6 7 PING Confirmation Portable Station PS Connection 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Feature Guide References 5 2 4 1 Portable Station PS Connection Power Failure Transfer Feature Guide References 5 6 2 Power Failure Transfer ...

Page 1038: ...ist Feature Guide References 5 2 4 2 PS Ring Group PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneous System Wireless PS Out of Range Timer s 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 System Wireless Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 4 2 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group PT Programming 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 Sy...

Page 1039: ...BX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering Plan Quick Dial Feature Guide References 2 6 5 Quick Dialling Reverse Circuit 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Reverse Detection Feature Guide References 2 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit Ring Tone Pattern Selection 10 8 1 PBX Configuration 2 8 1 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 10 8 2 PBX Configurat...

Page 1040: ... IP Address Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT NTP Server Port No Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT Keep Alive Packet Type Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time s Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT SIP Register Expire Time s Setting parameters for Networking Survivability assigned to Remote SIP MLT NA...

Page 1041: ...9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT Port Property Feature Guide References 5 2 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension SIP Session Initiation Protocol Trunk 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Card Property 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Feature Guide Ref...

Page 1042: ...n Directory System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 2 6 4 Speed Dialling Personal System Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start s 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Charge Main...

Page 1043: ... Distribution Group Group Settings Main Tenant Number 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Tenant Number 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Tenant No 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 ...

Page 1044: ...coming Call DDI DID Table DDI DID Destination Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 4 2 1 TIE Line Service Time Service 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Time Service Day Lunch Break Night Switch 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings M...

Page 1045: ... 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 15 1 PBX Configuration 7 1 TRS Denied Code 15 2 PBX Configuration 7 2 TRS ...

Page 1046: ...S Answer 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH Paging EPG 1 6 External Pager 1 6 13 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Optional Device External Pager Feature Guide References 2 17 2 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Trunk Busy Out 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Busy Out Status 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Bu...

Page 1047: ...g Mode Auto Forwarding Expires Feature Guide References 3 2 1 2 Auto Forwarding Unified Messaging Auto Receipt 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Auto Receipt Feature Guide References 3 2 2 1 Auto Receipt Unified Messaging Automated Attendant AA 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Wait Time for First Digit 0 20 s Menu Repeat Cycle 1 5 times Play Owner s Name during ...

Page 1048: ...rnal Call Supervisor Mailbox Number Feature Guide References 3 2 1 4 Automatic Two way Recording for Manager Unified Messaging Call Services 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Incoming Call Service Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Incoming Call Service Parameter Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Incoming Call Service Prompt Feature Guide Re...

Page 1049: ...ified Messaging Caller ID Callback 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Caller ID Callback 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Transfer to Outside Trunk Group 1 64 Caller ID Callback Feature Guide References 3 2 2 9 Caller ID Callback Unified Messaging Caller ID Screening 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Call Transfer Caller ID Screen Feature Guide References...

Page 1050: ...eature Guide References 3 2 1 15 Custom Service Unified Messaging Custom Service Builder 23 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Custom Service Builder Feature Guide References 3 1 2 2 Custom Service Builder Unified Messaging Default Mailbox Template 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Adding Mailboxes Feature Guide References 3 1 2 3 Default Mailbox Templat...

Page 1051: ...ox Settings Full Setting Personal Distribution List 24 1 UM Configuration 5 1 System Parameters Mailbox Group Feature Guide References 3 2 2 14 Group Distribution Lists Unified Messaging Hold 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Operator Service Busy Coverage Mode Call Hold Mode Call Hold Mode Call Queuing Annou...

Page 1052: ...to a Mailbox 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension Feature Guide References 3 2 1 22 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox Unified Messaging Intercom Paging 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Call Transfer Intercom Paging Group 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Intercom Paging Parameters Feature Guide References...

Page 1053: ... 26 Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Unified Messaging Mailbox 7 5 3 Utility Report UM View Reports 20 1 UM Configuration 1 Mailbox Settings Feature Guide References 3 2 2 17 Mailbox Unified Messaging Manager Service Switching 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General System Manager Authority Message Manager Authority Feature Guide References 3 2 2 19 Manager Service Switchin...

Page 1054: ...ng Notification Lamp Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Only Urgent Messages Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Dial Number 0 9 T X Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 No of Retries Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Busy Delay Time min Telephone Device Device No...

Page 1055: ...1 34 Operator Service Unified Messaging Password Administration 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Password Mailbox Password Message Client Feature Guide References 3 1 2 4 Password Administration Unified Messaging Personal Custom Service 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv P...

Page 1056: ...irect Service Remote Call Telephone Number 1 2 Feature Guide References 3 2 2 26 Remote Call Forwarding Set Unified Messaging Subscriber Tutorial 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Tutorial Feature Guide References 3 2 2 27 Subscriber Tutorial Unified Messaging System Backup Restore 6 8 Tool UM Data Backup 6 9 Tool UM Data Restore 6 10 Tool UM Backup History Feature Guide References ...

Page 1057: ...Time for No New Message 5 60 s Feature Guide References 3 2 2 29 Toll Saver Unified Messaging Transfer Recall to a Mailbox 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Transfer Recall s 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings Transfer Recall to Mailbox Feature Guide References 3 2 1 42 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox Unified Messaging Trunk Serv...

Page 1058: ...sages Subscriber Service New Urgent Messages Receiving Message Service New Urgent Messages 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox First Playback Urgent Message Feature Guide References 3 2 2 31 Urgent Message Unified Messaging Voice Mail VM Transfer Button 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer 12 2 3 PBX Configur...

Page 1059: ... 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous VIP Call Mode Feature Guide References 2 2 2 5 VIP Call Virtual PS 9 34 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Registration Feature Guide References 5 2 4 6 Virtual PS Voice Mail VM Group 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Port Property DPT Type Type 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuratio...

Page 1060: ...mber for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 12 3 PBX Configuration 4 3 Extension DSS Console Type Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Transfer Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone VM Trunk Group No 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Tabl...

Page 1061: ...ion 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Transfer Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Exten...

Page 1062: ...es Walking Extension 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension PIN Feature Guide References 2 24 3 Walking Extension Features Whisper OHCA 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT Port Property Option IP Codec Priority 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA ...

Page 1063: ...iguration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Wireless XDP Shared Extension Feature Guide References 5 2 4 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode PC Programming Manual 1063 Feature Programming References ...

Page 1064: ...right This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 2014 PNQX6305ZA CC0114AH0 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for KX-NS500

zipwake S Series Troubleshooting Manual preview
S Series
Brand: zipwake Pages: 12
jbc UCR Instruction Manual preview
UCR
Brand: jbc Pages: 12
Lars Thrane LT-4100 User & Installation Manual preview
LT-4100
Brand: Lars Thrane Pages: 141
Estun E21S Installation Manual preview
E21S
Brand: Estun Pages: 41
Polycom EagleEye Director Quick Integration Manual preview
EagleEye Director
Brand: Polycom Pages: 13
Kicker PRAMCQ13 Manual preview
PRAMCQ13
Brand: Kicker Pages: 9
Daewoo AXL-125 Service Manual preview
AXL-125
Brand: Daewoo Pages: 22
Barco Cine VERSUM 50 Owner'S Manual preview
Cine VERSUM 50
Brand: Barco Pages: 37
Avaya IX Room Systems XT Series Release Notes preview
IX Room Systems XT Series
Brand: Avaya Pages: 41
Listen Technologies Audio Everywhere Advanced Manual preview
Audio Everywhere
Brand: Listen Technologies Pages: 2
Qtx PPA72 User Manual preview
PPA72
Brand: Qtx Pages: 5
Panasonic SC-EN37 Operating Instructions Manual preview
SC-EN37
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Panasonic SCEN15 - DESKTOP CD AUDIO SYS Operating Instructions Manual preview
SCEN15 - DESKTOP CD AUDIO SYS
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Panasonic SCEN33 - CD STEREO SYSTEM Operating Instructions Manual preview
SCEN33 - CD STEREO SYSTEM
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Blaupunkt MS16BT Series Owner'S Manual preview
MS16BT Series
Brand: Blaupunkt Pages: 103
Raven RCM-Sprayer Hawkeye 2 Installation Manual preview
RCM-Sprayer Hawkeye 2
Brand: Raven Pages: 54
AMX VTX Instruction Manual preview
VTX
Brand: AMX Pages: 58
Martronic Engineering Laser Tech 304 Operating Manual preview
Laser Tech 304
Brand: Martronic Engineering Pages: 8

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands